DIC 99
OWNER’S MANUAL
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation
Printed in China
WA44060 301APAP3.3-01A0
OWNER’S
OWNER’S MANUAL
MANUAL
Introduction
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on
the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where
anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over
power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an
extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an
extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or
less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number,
the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by
Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing
loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high
volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time
period before damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or
accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with
the product or as optional accessories. Some of these
items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.
Please make sure that benches are stable and any
optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating
only. No other uses are recommended.
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable
battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The
average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries.
Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that
the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and
that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new,
or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be
installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation
may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.
Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used
batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your
area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type
batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair,
or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at
an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is
unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should
record the model number, serial number, and the date
of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is
operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user
safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe
that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-BP (bottom)
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
•
•
•
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in
damage to the instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as
heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise
damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
Do not open
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in
•
damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If you notice any abnormality
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if
there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if
any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,
immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor
plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no
user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Location
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
•
•
always hold the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or
during electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or
•
•
•
•
(3)-7
extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or
in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo
equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,
the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it
might accidentally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and
other cables.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching
the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could
cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
1/2
PSR-2100/1100
3
Connections
Saving data
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the
power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
Saving and backing up your data
• Some of the current memory data (see page 42) is lost when you
turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy
disk/the User Drive (see page 39, 47).
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk.
Maintenance
When you change settings in a display page and then exit
from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter
Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically
stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the
power without properly exiting from the relevant display.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated
wiping cloths.
Handling caution
Backing up the floppy disk
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the
•
•
•
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks.
gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,
since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or
connectors.
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high
or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, consult a physician.
Caution for data operations
Make sure NEVER to turn the PSR-2100/1100’s power off during any kind of data operation involving the USER/
FLOPPY DISK drives — such as saving, deleting, or copying/pasting — until the operation is completely finished.
(Make sure to wait until the alert message disappears.)
Turning the power off during the operation results in the loss of the data being saved or pasted to the respective drive.
Keeping the power on during such operations is particularly important in regard to the USER drive. Turning off the
power while performing a save/delete/paste operation with the USER drive may result in loss of ALL data on the USER
drive (upon the next power on) — and not just the data in question. In other words, if you are performing a save/delete/
paste operation on only the song data of the USER drive and you turn off the power before the operation is completed,
you risk losing ALL your USER drive data — including all voices, styles, Multi Pad banks and Registration Memory presets you’ve saved to the USER drive.
This caution also applies to creating a new folder on the USER drive or using the factory reset operation (page 154).
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
(3)-7
4
PSR-2100/1100
2/2
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-2100/1100!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully
so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced
and convenient functions of the PSR-2100/1100.
We also recommend that you keep this manual
in a safe and handy place for future reference.
PSR-2100/1100
5
Accessories
■ PA-300 AC Adaptor*
■ Floppy Disk (blank)
■ Music Rest (page 17)
■ Data List
■ Owner’s Manual
* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.
Also, a separate Data List is provided.
Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first.
Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions.
Basic Operation (page 38): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.
Reference (page 55): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-2100/1100’s various
functions.
Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR-2100, and in English.
* This product (PSR-2100) is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and
No.5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd.
* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE
data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Trademarks:
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
6
PSR-2100/1100
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disk
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible Disk Type
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,
towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the
slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into
place and the eject button pops out.
Drive lamp
When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at
the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the
drive can be used.
• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
when the data is being written to the floppy disk.
Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk
drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;
the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is
fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.
• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject
properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the
drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do
not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since
using force in this situation can damage the disk drive
mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially
ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,
or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the
eject procedure.
• Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data read and write errors.
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data
is not being written to the floppy disk.
If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in
the following operations, the messages “Now
executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”
appears in the display.
• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data
(page 45 - 47).
• Naming files and folders (page 44); creating a new
folder (page 47).
• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 153);
formatting the disk (page 153).
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will
eventually cause read and write errors.
• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
• Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
Eject button
PSR-2100/1100
7
About the Floppy Disks
To handle floppy disks with care:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy
disks in their protective cases when they are not in
use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,
since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase
data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are
attached in the proper location.
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position
(tab open).
write-protect tab open
(protect position)
Data backup
• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
you keep two copies of important data on separate
floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to
Disk function on page 153.
About the Display Messages
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.
F
G
H
I
J
For this example, press the
[G] (YES) button to
execute formatting.
8
PSR-2100/1100
You can select the desired
language from the Help display (page 52).
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Accessories ............................................................... 6
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)
and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7
About the Display Messages.................................... 8
Application Index ................................................... 12
What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100?.......... 14
Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100.............................. 16
Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18
Reference
Playing the Demos .................55
Voices.....................................57
Selecting a Voice .................................................... 57
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds
Simultaneously .................................................... 59
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 59
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left
and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 60
Quick Guide ........................... 20
Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 60
PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel........ 61
Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 61
Playing the Demos ................................................. 20
Song Playback ........................................................ 21
Styles......................................62
Playback of Songs ....................................................21
Playing Voices ........................................................ 25
Playing a style ........................................................ 62
Playing a Voice ........................................................25
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26
Playing Different Voices with the
Left and Right Hands ............................................27
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 64
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 64
Playing Styles ......................................................... 28
Playing a style ..........................................................28
Style Sections...........................................................30
One Touch Setting...................................................32
Music Finder........................................................... 33
Using the Music Finder ............................................33
Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34
Playing with the Songs .......................................... 36
Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100....................36
Recording ................................................................37
Basic Operations
— Organizing Your Data ....... 38
Contents shown in the Main Display .................... 38
Open/Save Display................................................. 39
Example — Open/Save display ................................40
Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 43
File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 44
Naming Files/Folders ...............................................44
Moving Files/Folders ................................................45
Copying Files/Folders...............................................46
Deleting Files/Folders...............................................46
Saving Files ..............................................................47
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............47
Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................47
Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................47
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 49
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 50
Help Messages ....................................................... 52
Using the Metronome............................................ 53
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 53
Tap Tempo ..............................................................54
Chord Fingerings.................................................... 65
Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS:
MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ......... 67
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys
(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 68
Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ...69
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 69
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style
(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 70
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings
with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 71
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting
(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 71
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music
— Music Finder.................................................... 72
Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search.. 73
Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 74
The Multi Pads .......................76
Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 76
Chord Match .......................................................... 76
Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 77
Song Playback........................78
Compatible Song Types ......................................... 78
Song Playback ........................................................ 79
Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 79
Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................... 81
Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 81
Muting Specific Parts
— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks ............................ 82
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 82
PSR-2100/1100
9
Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 83
Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 86
Creating Multi Pad
— Multi Pad Creator ............121
Saving and Recalling
Custom Panel Setups
— Registration Memory ........ 87
Operation ............................................................. 121
Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 122
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory... 87
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................88
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 89
Editing Voices
— Sound Creator ................... 90
Operation ............................................................... 90
Regular Voice Parameters...................................... 91
Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)................................ 94
Recording Your Performances
and Creating Songs
— Song Creator ..................... 95
About Song Recording........................................... 95
Quick Recording..................................................... 96
Multi Recording ..................................................... 97
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 99
Operation ................................................................99
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ............101
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) .............................102
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out — Rec Mode.......................... 104
Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 105
Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 123
Adjust the Volume Balance
and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console ................124
Operation ............................................................. 124
Setting the Level Balance and Voice
— Volume/Voice ............................................... 125
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 126
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 126
Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 127
Effect Structure ..................................................... 129
Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only) ........ 130
Using a Microphone
— MIC. (PSR-2100 only) .......131
Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type ......................... 131
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony
and Microphone — MICROPHONE SETTING ... 133
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings
and Microphone Effects — OVERALL SETTING ... 133
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects
— TALK SETTING............................................... 135
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .....105
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................108
Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................109
Editing System Events
— SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................109
Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................110
Customizing the Event List — Filter........................110
Making Global and
Other Important Settings
— Function...........................136
Creating Accompaniment Styles
— Style Creator ................... 111
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 138
Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 138
About Creating Accompaniment Styles .............. 111
Style File Format .................................................. 112
Operation ............................................................. 112
Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 113
Step Recording..................................................... 114
Assembling an Accompaniment Style
—Assembly ........................................................ 115
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 116
Change the Rhythmic Feel
— Groove and Dynamics ....................................116
Editing the Channel Data.......................................118
Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter .....119
10
Start recording...................................................... 122
Stop recording...................................................... 122
PSR-2100/1100
Operation ............................................................. 136
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale
— Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 138
Setting Song-related Parameters
— Song Settings................................................ 140
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
— Style Setting, Split Point,
and Chord Fingering......................................... 141
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 141
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering 142
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard
— Controller...................................................... 142
Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 142
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation
and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel...................... 144
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set..................................................... 145
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration
Memory Presets — Registration Sequence ..........145
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................145
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings
— Voice Set ........................................................146
Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 146
Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 148
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control,
Clock, etc.) — System.........................................148
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................149
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................150
Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................150
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............150
Introduction
Quick Guide
Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data
Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 151
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............151
Making Settings for the Display
and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........152
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................153
Entering Your Name and Language Preference
— Owner............................................................154
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the
PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset .........................154
Playing the Demos
Voices
Styles
Using Your PSR-2100/1100
with Other Devices.............. 155
The Multi Pad
Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). ..................155
Connecting the Microphone or Guitar
(MIC./LINE IN jack) (PSR-2100 only)...................155
Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an
external audio system, and recording the sounds to
an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) .....156
Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller
(FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................156
Connecting external MIDI devices
(MIDI terminals) .................................................156
Connecting to a Computer
(USB terminal, MIDI terminal).............................157
What’s MIDI? .........................................................158
What You Can Do With MIDI .................................160
MIDI Data Compatibility ........................................161
Disk format ............................................................161
Sequence Format...................................................161
Voice Allocation Format .........................................162
Song Playback
Troubleshooting.................. 163
Specifications ...................... 165
Index ................................... 167
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
- Registration Memory
Editing Voices - Sound Creator
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
- Song Creator
Creating Accompaniment Styles
- Style Creator
Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
- Mixing Console
Using a Microphone - MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
Making Global and Other Important Settings
- Function
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
Appendix
PSR-2100/1100
11
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular
application and situation.
Listening
Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 79
Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 81
Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 55
Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 57
Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-2100/1100 ......................................................... page 125
Playing
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 144
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60
Changing the sound
Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 60
.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 127
Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 125
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90
Playing the auto accompaniment
Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 62
Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 72
Practicing
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 53
Recording
Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 96, 97
Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 99
Creating your original settings
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90
Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 111
Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 121
12
PSR-2100/1100
Application Index
Using a microphone (PSR-2100 only)
Connecting the microphone.............. “Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)” on page 155
Adding automatic harmonies to your singing ....................................................................................... page 131
Settings
Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 87
Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 138
Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 140
Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 141
Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 144
Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 148
Connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other devices
Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 158
Recording your performance........“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156
Raising the volume ......................“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156
Connecting a computer..................... .“Connecting to a Computer (USB terminal/MIDI terminals)” on page 157
Quick solution
Basic functions of the PSR-2100/1100 and how you can best use it ................................................pages 12, 14
Resetting the PSR-2100/1100 to the default setting
................. “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset” on page 154
Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 163
PSR-2100/1100
13
What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100?
SONG
Multi Pads
DEMO
Playback previously recorded
songs (page 21, 36, 78)
Add spice to your performance
with special dynamic phrases
(page 76, 121)
Explore the Demos
(page 20, 55)
Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs
as well as songs on commercially
available disks.
These not only showcase the
stunning voices and styles of
the instrument, they
introduce you to the various
functions and features — and
give you hands-on
experience using the PSR2100/1100!
By simply pressing one of the Multi
Pads, you can play short rhythmic or
melodic phrases. You can also create
your original Multi Pad phrases by
recording them directly from the
keyboard.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
A
SYNC. START
SWING &
JAZZ
DIGITAL RECORDING
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
B
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
LATIN
DANCE
C
USER
PART
D
MENU
DEMO
E
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
STOP
FUNCTION
BALANCE
MULTI PAD
DIRECT
ACCESS
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
STANDBY
ON
14
CHANNEL ON/OFF
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
SYNC.
START
1
PART
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
STYLE
DIGITAL RECORDING
Back up your performance with Auto
Accompaniment (page 28, 62)
Record your performances
(page 95, 111)
Playing a chord with your left hand automatically
plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an
accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,
etc. — and let the PSR-2100/1100 be your backing
band!
With the powerful and easy-to-use song
recording features, you can record your
own keyboard performances, and create
your own complete, fully orchestrated
compositions — which you can then save to
the USER drive or a floppy disk for future
recall.
PSR-2100/1100
2
3
4
4
LCD
MUSIC FINDER
VOICE
The large LCD (together
with the various panel
buttons) provides
comprehensive and easyto-understand control of
the PSR-2100/1100’s
operations.
Call up the perfect accompaniment
style (page 33, 72)
Enjoy a huge variety of
realistic voices (page 25, 57)
If you know what song you want to play,
but you don’t know which style or voice
would be right for it, let the Music Finder
help you. Just select the song title, and
the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls
up the most appropriate style and voice.
The PSR-2100/1100 features a
wealth of exceptionally authentic
and dynamic voices — including
piano, strings, woodwinds, and
more!
BACK
NEXT
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
DSP
VARIATION
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
PERCUSSION
MAIN
F
LAYER
GUITAR
G
LEFT
H
STRINGS
CHOIR & PAD
Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)
I
USER
ORGAN FLUTES
UPPER OCTAVE
J
MUSIC
FINDER
Craft your own organ voices
(page 94)
RESET
MIC.
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
This special function not only gives you a
full set of rich and luscious organ sounds,
it also lets you create your own original
organ voices, just as on a traditional
organ, by increasing and decreasing the
flute footages, and adding percussive
sounds.
MEMORY
OVER
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
USB terminal
Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only)
Make music with a computer — quickly and
easily (page 157)
Add automatic vocal backing to your singing (page 131)
The amazing Vocal Harmony feature (on the PSR-2100)
automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals
that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the
gender of the harmony voices — for example, letting you add
female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa).
Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of
computer music software. Connections and setup
are exceptionally easy, and you can play back
your computer recorded parts with different
instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-2100/
1100!
LCD
CONTRAST
USB
IN
MIDI
OUT
2
FOOT PEDAL
MIC. LINE
INPUT
VOLUME
MIC./
LINE IN
R
L
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
OUTPUT
DC IN 16V
(LEVEL FIXED)
PSR-2100/1100
15
Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100
Power Supply
Power-on Procedure
sure that the PSR-2100/1100’s STANDBY/ON
1 Make
switch is at the STANDBY (off) position.
2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300.
the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-2100/
3 Connect
1100’s DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear
When you have made all the necessary connections
(page 155) between your PSR-2100/1100 and any other
devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned
down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in
your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI
slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,
amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI
operation and prevents speaker damage.
When powering down the setup, first turn down the
volume for each audio device, then switch off each
device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then
MIDI).
panel.
MIDI master (transmitting device)
R
L
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
OUTPUT
POWER
DC IN 16V
ON!!
(LEVEL FIXED)
DC IN
To electrical outlet
PSR-2100/1100 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)
the other end (normal AC plug) to the
4 Connect
nearest electrical outlet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an
incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR2100/1100, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS
UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET
WHEN THE PSR-2100/1100 IS NOT IN USE.
CAUTION
Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor)
during any PSR-2100/1100 record operation! Doing so can result
in a loss of data.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity
is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not
using the PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure
to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
16
PSR-2100/1100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L
R
Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)
Powering Up
Music Rest
CAUTION
In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected
electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the 2100/1100
before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and
amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the 2100/1100 after
switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,electricity is still
flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the
PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
n
Before you switch your 2100/1100 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment.
1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.
→ The main display appears in the display.
The PSR-2100/1100 is supplied with a music rest that
can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into
the slot at the rear of the control panel.
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the PSR-2100/1100 panel indicate
standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard
which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will
play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or
synthesizer from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly
expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard
with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and
effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By
using the PSR-2100/1100 XG voices, it is possible to record
XG-compatible song files.
XF Format
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future. The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of
displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
(SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files.
The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1,
and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.)
STANDBY
ON
BACK
NEXT
MAIN
A
F
B
G
C
H
LAYER
D
I
E
J
LEFT
MUSIC
FINDER
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the
[STANDBY/ON] switch again.
→ Both the display and the drive lamp (at the
bottom left of the drive) will turn off.
2 Adjusting the display contrast
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the
contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST]
knob on the rear panel.
3 Setting the volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME]
dial to adjust the volume to
an appropriate level.
LCD
CONTRAST
Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only)
Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal
processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal
harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony
can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as
well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal
harmony effects.
Disk Orchestra Collection
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback
compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and
MIDI devices.
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format,
which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality
automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
types. The PSR-2100/1100 uses the SFF internally, reads
optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style
Creator feature.
MASTER VOLUME
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
MAX
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial
interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It
allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while
the power to the computer is on).
PSR-2100/1100
17
Panel Controls and Terminals
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
(STYLE)
74
USB
TOP
10
9
START/STOP
11
NEW SONG
SYNC. START
5
REW
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
12 13
MARCH &
WALTZ
BALLROOM
A
B
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
LATIN
DANCE
38
USER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
39
40
41
TEMPO
16
17
RESET
18
RESET
MASTER VOLUME
STOP
22
21 MULTI PAD
MAIN
BREAK
ACMP
D
E
HELP
FUNCTION
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
20
24
26 27
25
43
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
STANDBY
ON
23
28 29 30
44
CHANNEL ON/OFF
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
C
PART
MENU
DEMO
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
42
36
37
14
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
POP & ROCK
19
OUT
MIDI
(R)
STYLE
MIN
75
IN
METRONOME
REPEAT
10
8
(L)
REC
15
TRACK
1
79
6
55
LCD
CONTRAST
SYNC.
START
45
PART
46
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
31 32 33 34
35
1
PITCH BEND
MODULATION
2
3
4
PHONES
C1
CLICK 36
D1
T 37
E1
38
S 39
POWER
1
[STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17
WHEEL
2
3
PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 61
MODULATION (PSR-2100 only) .......................................... P. 61
PHONES
4
[PHONES] jack .................................................................. P. 155
METRONOME
5
[METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 53
SONG
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 82
[TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 82
[TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 82
[REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 82
[REC] button ........................................................................ P. 95
[TOP] button......................................................................... P. 81
[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 79
[REW] button........................................................................ P. 81
[FF] button............................................................................ P. 81
STYLE
15 STYLE buttons ..................................................................... P. 62
TRANSPOSE
16 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 144
TEMPO
17 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 53
18 [TAP TEMPO] button ............................................................ P. 54
18
PSR-2100/1100
F1
40
R 41
G1
42
L 43
A1
44
L 45
B1
46
M 47
C2
H 48
D2
49
M 50
E2
51
H 52
F2
G2
L 53
54
H 55
A2
56
L 57
B2
58
M 59
L
C3
M 60
H
D3
C 61
1
H 62
E3
R 63
1
F3
64
R 65
G3
66
S 6
MASTER VOLUME
19 [MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17
20 [FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 68
MULTI PAD
21 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 76
22 [STOP] button ...................................................................... P. 76
STYLE CONTROL
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
[ACMP] button...................................................................... P. 63
[BREAK] button.................................................................... P. 67
[INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 69
MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 67
MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 67
MAIN [C] button ................................................................... P. 67
MAIN [D] button ................................................................... P. 67
[ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 69
[AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 69
[OTS LINK] button................................................................ P. 71
[SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 68
[SYNC.START] button .......................................................... P. 63
[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 63
DIGITAL STUDIO
36 [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 90
37 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ................................... P. 95, 111
38 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 124
MENU
39 [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 55
40 [HELP] button....................................................................... P. 52
41 [FUNCTION] button ........................................................... P. 136
76 77
78
72
2
FOOT PEDAL
INPUT
VOLUME
MIC. LINE
47
BACK
NEXT
73
79
R
L
AUX OUT
MIC./
LINE IN
R
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
48
TOUCH
42
63
MAIN
49
PIANO & HARPSI.
GUITAR
LAYER
G
LEFT
H
I
DC IN 16V
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
DSP
VARIATION
57 58 59 60 61 62
56
VOICE
F
80
L/L+R
OUTPUT
(LEVEL FIXED)
50
STRINGS
51
USER
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
CHOIR & PAD
PERCUSSION
71
ORGAN FLUTES
UPPER OCTAVE
J
MUSIC
FINDER
65
66
64
RESET
MIC.
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
OVER
SIGNAL
67 ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
52
53
54
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
DATA ENTRY
68
G3
S 67
A3
68
C 69
2
B3
70
R 71
2
C4
H 72
D4
L 73
E4
74
H 75
MEMORY
69
F4
L 76
H 77
70
G4
L 78
H 79
A4
L 80
B4
81
82
H 83
C5
L 84
D5
S 85
L 86
E5
87
H 88
F5
L 89
G5
M 90
O 91
DISPLAY CONTROL
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
[A] - [J] buttons ..................................................................... P. 43
[DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 50
[BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 64
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 64, 81
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ................................................. P. 38 - 48
[BACK] button ................................................................ P. 43, 49
[NEXT] button ................................................................ P. 43, 49
VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 59
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 59
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 59
[ENTER] button .................................................................... P. 49
[DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 49
[EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 43
[LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17
VOICE EFFECT
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
[LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 61
[TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 60
[SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 60
[HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 61
[MONO] button ..................................................................... P. 61
[DSP] button......................................................................... P. 60
[VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 61
VOICE
63 VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 57
UPPER OCTAVE
A5
92
B5
93
94
C6
95
96
MIC.
65 MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ........................................... P. 131
MUSIC FINDER
66 [MUSIC FINDER] button ...................................................... P. 72
ONE TOUCH SETTING
67 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 70
REGISTRATION MEMORY
68 [FREEZE] button.................................................................. P. 89
69 [1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 87
70 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 87
FLOPPY DISK
71 Floppy disk drive (3.5”)........................................................... P. 7
Microphone (PSR-2100 only)
72 [INPUT VOLUME] knob...................................................... P. 155
73 [MIC. LINE IN] jack............................................................. P. 155
Connectors
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
[USB] terminal.................................................................... P. 157
MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 156
[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack....................................... P. 156
[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 156
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 156
OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................... P. 156
DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 156
64 [UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 61
PSR-2100/1100
19
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing the Demos
Reference
on page 55
The PSR-2100/1100 features an extensive variety of
Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and
its dynamic rhythms and styles.
Demo button
What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo
functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of
all the important features and functions of the instrument
— letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the
PSR-2100/1100 in your own music.
1
2
Press the [DEMO] button to
call up the menu for
MENU
DEMO
selecting a Demo
song.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo
categories.
BACK
NEXT
HELP
FUNCTION
Function Demos demonstrate many of the different
functions on the PSR-2100/
1100. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and
accompaniment styles of the
PSR-2100/1100 (page 55).
For this example, VOICE
is selected. Voice Demos
showcase the voices of
the PSR-2100/1100.
3
Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.
For this example, press the [A] button to playback the Oboe demo.
MAIN
A
F
LAYER
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
For details about the Demos,
refer to page 55.
LEFT
8
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the
demo songs.
When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-2100/1100 even better with these functions:
• Song playback (page 21)
• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).
20
Quick Guide
Song Playback
Song Playback
Reference
on page 78
Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of
the PSR-2100/1100 come together — in songs!
Song related buttons
Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 154) is the same
as that of the file name of the
song that you are playing
back.
BALANCE and
CHANNEL buttons
Floppy disk drive
The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-2100/1100. Refer to pages 78, 161 for more details on
the logos.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM
standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
Playback of Songs
1
If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.
CAUTION
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 7.
Quick Guide
21
Song Playback
2
Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
From the MAIN display (the
display shown when the
power is turned on), you can
select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc.
A
B
C
D
E
FLOPPY DISK (commercially available
songs, your own songs, etc.)
PRESET (Songs for Demos)
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.
In the example display at left, the PRESET page is
selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected.
3
Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.
A
B
C
D
E
22
Quick Guide
Song Playback
4
5
Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file.
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
6
START/STOP
• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.
• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 83 and 86 for
details.
SYNC. START
While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —
letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly!
1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.
CHANNEL ON/OFF
PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If the STYLE tab is
selected, press this button
again.
Quick Guide
23
Song Playback
7
Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels
of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing (PSR-2100 only), and your playing.
1) Press the [BALANCE] button.
2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.
BALANCE
You can call up a full set of
mixing controls by pressing
the [MIXING CONSOLE]
button (page 124).
1
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
REC
NEW SONG
24
2
Quick Guide
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC. START
• The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 68) can be used
to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when
starting and stopping the
song, as well as the
accompaniment.
Playing Voices
Playing Voices
Reference
on page 57
The PSR-2100/1100 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try
playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how
to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.
Voice related buttons
Playing a Voice
1
Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for
selecting MAIN voice.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
Turn MAIN on.
MAIN
F
LAYER
G
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 59 for more
information.)
LEFT
H
I
J
You’ll want to hear the MAIN
voice all by itself — so make sure
that the LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
2
Select a voice group.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the memory
location of the voice. For this
example, PRESET is
selected.
For this example, STRINGS
is selected.
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
CHOIR & PAD
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
Quick Guide
25
Playing Voices
3
Select a voice.
• You can instantly jump
back to the Main display
by “double-clicking” on
one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
• The voices displayed on
the PSR-1100 are different from the example display at left; however, the
operations are identical.
A
B
C
D
For this example,
”Orchestra” is
selected.
E
Press the corresponding buttons to select the
other pages — and discover even more voices.
4
Press the [8▲] button to start the
Demo for the selected voice. To stop
the Demo, press this button again.
There’s more to the Demo features
than just voices, though–for more
information, see page 55.
Play the voices.
Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also
have the PSR-2100/1100 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲]
button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously
1
Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn
the LAYER part on.
MAIN
LAYER
2
3
Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.
Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up
the “CHOIR & PAD” group.
LEFT
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
GUITAR
4
Select a voice.
For example, select “Gothic Vox.”
STRINGS
USER
5
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
CHOIR & PAD
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
Play the voices.
Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich
sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the
previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve
selected here.
And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:
• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 90).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 87).
26
Quick Guide
Playing Voices
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
1
Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT
part on.
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
2
3
Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.
Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play
rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
GUITAR
STRINGS
4
5
USER
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
CHOIR & PAD
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
For example, select “Symphon. Str.”
Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 141). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that
separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button
and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 141.)
MENU
DEMO
A
B
HELP
C
D
FUNCTION
E
6
7
Play the voices.
The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while
the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or
voices).
MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right
hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.
Split Point
LEFT
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
MAIN/LAYER
EXIT
Quick Guide
27
Playing Styles
Playing Styles
The PSR-2100/1100 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your
own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion
accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.
Reference
on page 62
Style related buttons
Playing a style
1
Select a style group and a style.
A
STYLE
POP & ROCK
SWING &
JAZZ
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
B
C
BALLAD
D
E
For this example, Dance is
selected.
2
For this example,
EuroTrance is selected.
Turn ACMP on.
The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords
played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with
the selected style.
Split Point
ACMP
Auto Accompaniment
section
28
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to
select the memory location of the
style. For this example, PRESET is
selected.
Quick Guide
• The point on the keyboard
that separates the auto
accompaniment section
and the right-hand section of the keyboard is
called the “split point.”
Refer to page 141 for
instructions on setting the
split point.
Playing Styles
3
Turn SYNC.START on.
SYNC.
START
4
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
5
6
7
Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary.
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its
original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.
The Tempo can also be
adjusted by using the [TAP
TEMPO] button (page 54).
Try playing other chords with your left hand.
For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 65.
Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.
And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:
• Easily create your own original styles (page 90).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 87).
Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects
This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your
right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.
1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE EFFECT
TOUCH
SUSTAIN
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
DSP
VARIATION
2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).
3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the
keyboard.
The PSR-2100/1100 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 146).
The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.
For details about Harmony/
Echo types, refer to the separate Data List.
• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of
the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 60).
Quick Guide
29
Playing Styles
Style Sections
Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic
style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,
Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements.
INTRO
MAIN
BREAK
ENDING
1-3
4
This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section.
This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,
and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed.
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your
performance sound even more professional.
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically.
Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.
Press the [INTRO] button.
5
MAIN
BREAK
INTRO
ENDING
/ rit.
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section.
6
7
8
30
Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]
button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure
on the next page.)
MAIN
BREAK
Quick Guide
ENDING
/ rit.
or
Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if
necessary.
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in
the Main sections.
Press the [ENDING] button.
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is
finished, the style automatically stops.
INTRO
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
MAIN
BREAK
INTRO
ENDING
/ rit.
Playing Styles
■ Accompaniment Structure
INTRO (page
(page 69)
xx)
INTRO A
INTRO B
INTRO C
(max. three patterns)
MAIN VARIATION
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
B
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
A
MAIN
VARIATION
C
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
D
via BREAK
Press the [ENDING] button.
ENDING
ENDING(page
(page xx)
69)
ENDING A
ENDING B
ENDING C
You can have the
ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by
pressing the [ENDING]
button again while the
ending is playing back.
(max. three patterns)
• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by
simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.
• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth
note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.
• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.
• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.
• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.
Other Controls
FADE IN/OUT
FADE
IN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.
STOP
The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 68)when starting and stopping
the style.
The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP TEMPO] button. For details,
see page 54.
When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your
performance. For details, see page 68.
Quick Guide
31
Playing Styles
ONE TOUCH SETTING
buttons
One Touch Setting
One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings
(voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to
instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PSR-2100/1100 to match the style you want to play.
1
2
3
4
5
Select a style (page 28).
Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.
Not only does this instantly call up all the settings
(voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see
page 70) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and
SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing
the style.
ONE TOUCH SETTING
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
Split Point
Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords
with your left hand.
Auto Accompaniment
section
Try out other One Touch Setting setups.
You can also create your own One Touch Setting
setups.
For details, refer to page 71.
ONE TOUCH SETTING
• Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS
(One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main
section (page 71).
32
Quick Guide
Music Finder
Music Finder
Reference
on page 72
MUSIC FINDER button
If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the
convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PSR-2100/
1100 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!
Using the Music Finder
1
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.
MUSIC
FINDER
2
Select a record.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the desired
page of records. For this
example, ALL is selected.
Select the desired
record.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For this example, press the [1▲▼] - [3▲▼] buttons to select a record by song title.
3
Play along with the style playback.
Split Point
You can also have the voice
and other important settings
change automatically with the
style changes. To do this, turn
on OTS LINK (page 71) and
set the OTS LINK TIMING
(page 141) to “REAL TIME”
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Quick Guide
33
Music Finder
Searching the Music Finder Records
The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and
instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.
1
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.
MUSIC
FINDER
2
Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.
The results of Search 1 and
2 appear in the correspondingly numbered SEARCH 1/
2 displays.
F
G
H
I
J
Refer to page 48 for instructions on entering characters.
4
For this example,
press the [A]
button to call up
the display for
inputting the song
title.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
For this example,
ANY is selected.
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the [F], [G]
and [H] to clear
the previous
conditions, if
necessary.
8
Enter the song title,
then press the [8▲]
(OK) button.
For this example,
ALL is selected.
34
7
3
Quick Guide
6
Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH)
button.
The search function calls up all
records that contain the entered
word or words.
Music Finder
7
Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk (pages 38 and 47). In this
way, you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other PSR-2100/1100 users.
For details, refer to page 74.
Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data
To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from
the SYSTEM RESET page (page 154) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same
procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 43, 47). To recall the saved
data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window.
Records can be replaced or added (page 74).
Music Finder data is compatible for both the PSR-2100
and the PSR-1100.
In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when
you save or load style files, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file(s) is
stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style file on a floppy disk to
the USER drive (page 45, 46), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant
style is automatically added to the PSR-2100/1100.
• In the example above, you specified a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music
genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 73).
Quick Guide
35
Playing with the Songs
Playing with the Songs
Reference
on page 78
Song related
buttons
Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100
In this section, try using the PSR-2100/1100’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while
you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you
perform.
1-4
5
Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.
Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.
TRACK
1
To cancel the left hand part,
press the [TRACK 2] button.
(R)
6
If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics,
press the [B] button.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
If the selected song does not
contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed.
A
B
C
D
E
7
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.
If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[
buttons.
REC
NEW SONG
8
START/STOP
SYNC. START
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
REC
NEW SONG
36
TOP
Quick Guide
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC. START
][
]
• If you want to start the song right
away without an intro, use the Sync
Start function. To set Sync Start to
standby, simultaneously hold down
the [TOP] button and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button. Song
playback starts automatically the
moment you start playing the melody.
• If you can hear the PSR-2100/1100
playing the melody part as well,
check the channel setting for the
melody part in the song data, and
change the channel assigned to
Track 1 (page 140). You can also
change the song channel itself permanently (page 106).
Playing with the Songs
Recording
The PSR-2100/1100 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture
your keyboard performance.
1-3
4
Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.
Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording.
REC
NEW SONG
5
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
SYNC. START
Press the [REC] button.
REC
6
Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.
7
When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button.
REC
8
To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
REC
NEW SONG
9
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC. START
CAUTION
The recorded data will be
lost if you turn off the
power. To keep your important recordings, you’ll
need to save them to the
User drive or floppy disk.
Save the recorded data as required (pages 39, 47).
Quick Guide
37
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Contents shown in the Main Display
When the power is turned on, the MAIN Display appears, showing important and relevant
operation information.
Pressing the [A]-[J] buttons when the MAIN Display appears calls up displays corresponding
to each button. The displays called up by the buttons (with the exception of [B] and [C]) are
called Open/Save displays (see following page). Pressing the [B] and [C] buttons calls up the
Lyrics display and Score display respectively.
8
If the MAIN Display is
not shown, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS]
button followed by the
[EXIT] button.
9
0
1
2
3
A
B
4
5
6
C
7
E
D
F
1 Transpose (page 144)
The [TRANSPOSE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard and song to be shifted down or up in semitones. The transpose value by the
semitone shifted is displayed here.
2 Song (page 78)
The name of the currently selected song and other song information is displayed.
3 Playback Position of Song (page 78) or Accompaniment Style (page 62)
The current position of the song or the accompaniment style being played is displayed.
4 Tempo (page 53)
When a song or a accompaniment style is playing, the tempo is displayed.
5 Chord (page 65)
When [ACMP] is on, the chord specified in the left hand section is displayed.
6 Accompaniment Style (page 62)
The name, beat, and tempo of the accompaniment style selected currently is displayed.
7 Intro and Ending (page 69)
The names of the intro and ending of the currently selected style are displayed.
8 Octave (page 61)
The [UPPER OCTAVE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps. The octave value shifted is displayed here.
9 Split Point (page 141)
Split Points are specific positions on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into separate sections. There are two kinds of Split Points: “A”, which
separates the auto accompaniment from the rest of the keyboard, and “L”, which divides the left-hand and right-hand sections.
0 Registration Sequence (page 145)
You can save your custom panel settings as a Registration Memory preset and recall it at any time pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION
MEMORY [1]-[8] button. You can also use the Registration Sequence function to program the Registration Memory presets to be selected in
any specified order, and step through that order by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal. The Registration Sequence is displayed
here (unless Registration Sequence mis set to OFF).
A Main Part (page 57)
The voice selected for the Main part is displayed.
B Layer Part (page 59)
The voice selected for the Layer part is displayed.
C Left Part (page 60)
The voice selected for the Left part is displayed.
D Multi Pad Bank (page 76)
The Multi Pads allow you to instantly play back special phrases (such as rhythmic fills and melodies) during your performance, by pressing the
MULTI PAD [1]-[8] buttons. Multi Pad data is stored in banks (four pads to a bank), and both preset and user banks are available. The name of the
currently selected Multi Pad bank is displayed here.
E Registration Memory Bank (page 88)
Registration Memory presets are stored in banks, eight presets to a bank. The name of the currently selected Registration Memory bank is
displayed here.
F Volume balance of the parts (page 64)
You can change the volume balance by pressing the [1▲▼]-[8▲▼] buttons under the LCD. The volume balance of each part is displayed.
38
PSR-2100/1100
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Open/Save Display
The PSR-2100/1100 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and
registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-2100/1100; you can
also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument.
All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer.
Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the
PSR-2100/1100 in files and folders.
Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these
displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data
efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder.
The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN
display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.
Open/Save display for
Song (page 79)
Open/Save display for
Voice (page 57)
Open/Save display for
Multi Pads (page 76, 121)
handles the Song files.
handles the Voice files.
handles the Multi Pad Bank
files.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Open/Save display for Style (page 62)
handles the Style files.
Open/Save display for Registration
Bank (page 88)
The following Open/
Save display types are
also available; however,
these are selected from
displays other than the
MAIN display
(page 154).
• SYSTEM SETUP
• MIDI SETUP
• USER EFFECT
• MUSIC FINDER
If the MAIN screen is
not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS]
button followed by the
[EXIT] button.
handles the Registration Bank files.
PSR-2100/1100
39
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Example — Open/Save display
Each Open/Save display consists of three kinds of drive pages: PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK.
In the examples given here, the Open/Save display for Voice is shown.
PRESET drive
The files that are preprogrammed and installed
internally to the PSR-2100/1100
are kept here. Preset files can be
loaded but cannot be re-written.
However, you can use a preset
file as a basis for creating your
own original file (which can be
saved in the USER or FLOPPY
DISK drive).
USER drive
Files kept here are those
containing your own original
data, created or edited using the
various functions of the PSR2100/1100. They are stored
internally to the PSR-2100/1100.
FLOPPY DISK drive
You can also store your original
data to floppy disk.
Commercially available disk
software can also be called up
here. Naturally, these files are
available only when the
appropriate disk is inserted in
the floppy disk drive.
BACK
NEXT
Changes drives among
PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK.
Calls up the upper
level directory page.
In this example, the
voice folder selection
page can be called
up.
File
All data, both preprogrammed and your own
original, are stored as “files.”
40
PSR-2100/1100
Current Memory
“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you
select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the
SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved
as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.
Recording songs (page 95) and creating accompaniment styles
(page 111) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to
properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or
files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.
For details, see page 42.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
■ Files and Drives
You can also manage files (copying,
saving, etc.) on the USER drive or
floppy disk by using a computer.
(page 157)
PRESET
USER
PRESET drive
FLOPPY DISK
USER drive
FLOPPY DISK drives
Cannot be overwritten
Voice
Voice
Style
Style
Style
Song
Song
Song
Multi Pad Bank
Multi Pad Bank
Multi Pad Bank
Registration Memory Bank
Copy
Vocal Harmony Type
(PSR-2100 only)
Vocal Harmony Type
System Setup
System Setup
MIDI Template
MIDI Template
Copy & Paste / Cut & Paste
Voice
Registration Memory Bank
System Setup
Save
MIDI Setup
MIDI Setup
MIDI Setup
User Effect
User Effect
User Effect
Music Finder
Music Finder
Music Finder
This is the Voice Open/Save display
called up by pressing the [PIANO] button in the VOICE section.
BACK
NEXT
Select a Memory drive by
using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons.
The Open/Save display
indicates only those
files that can be managed from the selected
display. The FD (Floppy
Disk) drive of the Voice
Open/Save display, for
example, indicates only
voices even if style or
song files are saved to
the floppy disk.
PSR-2100/1100
41
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
■ Features and Memory Drives
Data not maintained when the power is turned off
Data maintained when the power is turned off
Features
Current Memory
USER drive
FLOPPY DISK drive
Unedited voice
Compare
Sound Creator
Style Creator
Edit
Record/
Assemble
Register
Register
Panel settings
Song Creator
Multi Pad Creator
Creating a
New Record
Record
Record
Voice
Voice
Style
Style
One Touch Setting
Registration Memory
Registration Memory
Bank
Music Finder
Record
Music Finder
System Setup
System Setup
Song
Save
Song
Four Multi Pads
Multi Pad Bank
MIDI settings
MIDI Template
Edit
MIDI
Save
MIDI Setup
Vocal Harmony Type
(PSR-2100 only)
Edit
User Effect
(Mixing Console)
Edit
Master EQ Edit
(Mixing Console)
(PSR-2100 only)
Edit
User Vocal Harmony
User Effect
User Master EQ
CAUTION
The data in the USER/
FLOPPY DISK drive is
maintained even when the
power is turned off. However, currently active data
in memory may be lost
when you select another
file or turn the power off.
Make sure to save any
necessary data in memory to the User drive or the
Floppy Disk drive before
selecting another file or
turning the power off.
42
PSR-2100/1100
User Effect
* The Save operation is executed from the
Open/Save display.
**The corresponding Open/Save display
can be called up from the [FUNCTION]
→ UTILITY → SYSTEM RESET display.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Selecting Files and Folders
Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file.
First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI.] button to call up the display containing the files.
This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files).
The PSR-2100/1100 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices
created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.
“PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY
1 Select
DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT]
button.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
Selecting a different language in the “LANGUAGE” display (page 52, 154) may cause
the following problems.
• Some characters of the file names you
entered may be garbled.
• Files may not be accessible.
Restoring the original language solves
the above problems.
Reading the files on the computer with a
different language system may cause
similar problems to those above.
ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DATA ENTRY
3 Select the file/folder.
the [1▲] - [7▲] buttons to
2 Use
turn the pages.
When the amount of pages exceeds
seven, the bottom of the display changes
as shown below.
Press Next
Press Prev.(previous)
There are two ways to select the file/folder:
• Press the [A] - [J] button.
Press the letter button corresponding to the
file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example
display shown above, the voice files are
shown.)
• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the
[ENTER] button.
When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the
highlight moves among the available files/
folders. Highlight the desired file or folder
(voice files are shown in the example above)
and press the [ENTER] button to call up the
selected item.
Double-clicking the
appropriate [A] -[J] button
calls up the corresponding
file and returns to the MAIN
display.
Highlighting the desired file
and double-clicking the
[ENTER] button calls up the
corresponding file and
returns to the MAIN display.
END
Press the [EXIT] button
to go back to the MAIN
display.
You can go back to the
previous display by
pressing the [EXIT]
button.
Exiting from small pop-up
windows
You can also exit from small
pop-up windows (such as in the
illustration below) by pressing
the [EXIT] button.
PSR-2100/1100
43
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
File/Folder-related Operations
Naming Files/Folders
You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or
renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to
rename, copy them beforehand (page 46) and use them as User files/folders.
1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 39).
A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters
(or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID
(see the note below) and the
extension.
The NAME display appears.
2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons.
To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
The file name will appear on
your computer as follows. If
you change the Icon ID or
the extension, the icon may
change or the file may not be
properly recognized.
ABCDE.S002.MID
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
END
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Input the new name (page 48).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
44
PSR-2100/1100
File ID
Icon ID
Extension
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Moving Files/Folders
You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.
1 Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 39).
The CUT display appears.
This operation cannot be
used to directly move a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, cut and paste the file or
folder from the first floppy
disk to the USER page, then
change disks and paste it to
the FLOPPY DISK page.
2 Select the desired file/folder for moving.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel
the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY
DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to
release or cancel the selection.
All files/folders in a floppy
disk can be copied to
another disk in one batch
(page 153).
After being pasted, the files
are automatically re-ordered
in alphabetical order and
displayed.
3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
4 Call up the destination display.
Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.
END
Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.
The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.
About files/folders in a
floppy disk
In the FLOPPY DISK page
of the Open/Save display,
only the files which can be
handled in that Open/Save
display will appear — even
though a folder in a floppy
disk can contain different
kinds of files.
In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for
floppy disk), an entire folder
can be cut; however, only the
specific files which can be
handled in the current Open/
Save display will be pasted.
PSR-2100/1100
45
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Copying Files/Folders
You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.
1 Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 39).
Please note that the copy
functions are intended for
your personal use only.
The COPY display appears.
2 Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J]
buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/
FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL
OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.
Press the [7▼] (OK)
3 button.
To stop the operation,
press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
up the destination
4 Call
display.
END
Only the USER and FLOPPY
DISK pages can be selected
as the destination.
This operation cannot be
used to directly copy a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, copy and paste the file
or folder from the first floppy
disk to the User page, then
change disks and paste it to
the Floppy Disk page.
Press the [4▼]
(PASTE) button.
The file/folder you copied
is now pasted at the
destination.
Deleting Files/Folders
You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.
1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 39).
The DELETE display appears.
2 Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK)
button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select
another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even
those from other pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder
again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders
in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the
[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button
changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the
selection.
46
PSR-2100/1100
END
Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
The message “Are you sure you want to delete the
“******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.
YES ........... Deletes the highlighted item.
NO............. Exits from the prompt without deleting.
When several files have been selected, the message
“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or
data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.
YES/NO..... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or
skips the highlighted item without
deleting (NO).
YES ALL ... Deletes all selected items at once.
CANCEL ... Exits from the prompt without deleting.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Saving Files
This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current
memory (page 40) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK
drives.
If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to
the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective
Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 40).
the [6▼]
1 Press
(SAVE) button.
Enter a name for the new file (page 48).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
The internal memory capacity of the PSR-2100/1100 is
about 580KB (PSR-2100) /
260KB (PSR-1100). Memory
capacity for 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks is about 720KB
and 1440KB, respectively.
When you store data to these
locations, all file types of the
PSR-2100/1100 (Voice,
Style, Song, Registration,
etc.) are stored together.
The files of commercially
available DOC software and
Yamaha Disklavier software,
and their edited files on the
PSR-2100/1100, can be
stored in the USER page,
but cannot be copied to
another floppy disk.
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder
This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new
folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections.
up the page to
1 Call
which you wish to
create a new folder
and press the [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 39).
Enter the name of the new folder (page 48).
Folder directories can contain up to four levels.
The maximum total number
of files and folders which can
be stored is 800 (PSR-2100)
/ 400 (PSR-1100), but this
may differ depending on the
length of the file names.
The maximum number of
files which can be stored in a
folder will be 250.
Press the [8▲](OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
Displaying Upper Level pages
Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from
the file level pages.
Entering Characters and Changing Icons
the [1▼]
1 Press
(NAME), [6▼]
(SAVE), or [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 39).
Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.
If you select Japanese as the Language in the
FUNCTION display (page 154), the following
different types of characters and sizes can be
entered:
(kana-kan)
Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing
Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size)
the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon
(kana)
at the left of the file name.
Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)
(kana)
Katakana (half size), marks (half size)
A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size)
ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 154), the
following types of characters are available:
CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
PSR-2100/1100
47
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Entering Characters
The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the
same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.
1
2
3
Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.
Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.
To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.
If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the
[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the
[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is
deleted.
To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)
This applies only if you are using the “
(kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When
the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the
[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate
kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted
area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed
area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the
change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the
“hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button.
The following half-size
marks cannot be used in
naming files and folders:
¥\/:*?“<> |
■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”)
Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button
(before actual entry of the character.)
■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)
You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a
character by moving the cursor.
Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the
[8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.
■ Entering numbers
First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size
capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold
down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it
repeatedly until the desired number is selected.
48
PSR-2100/1100
In the case of characters
which are not accompanied
by special character marks
(with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana),
you can call up the mark list
by pressing the [6▼] button
after selecting a character
(before actual entry of a
character).
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Changing the Icon
You can also change the icon that
appears at the left of the file name.
Call up the ICON SELECT display by
pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from
the character input display (page 48).
Select the desired icon by using the
[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the
[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter
the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]
(OK) button.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
Turns pages
for icon
selection.
Enters the
selected icon.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cancels the icon selection operation.
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial
This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual
function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.
■ Adjusting values
You can change parameter values by
rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the
example [BALANCE] display, turning
the dial adjusts the volume of the part
in reverse display (highlight). To adjust
the volume of another part, first select
the part by pressing the [▲▼] button
corresponding to the part, then rotate
the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
DATA ENTRY
■ Selecting items
You can select the desired item or
function in the display by rotating the
[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item
can then be called up or executed by
using the [ENTER] button.
In the example VOICE display, you
can select the desired voice file with
the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up
the selected item by pressing the
[ENTER] button on the panel.
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
PSR-2100/1100
49
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays
DIRECT
ACCESS
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
LAYER
PART
D
I
MENU
DEMO
E
J
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
MAIN
INTRO
STANDBY
ON
SYNC.
START
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
SIGNAL
BALANCE
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
MULTI PAD
BREAK
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
OVER
STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
ACMP
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
STYLE CONTROL
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional
button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the
appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that
display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 142).
DIRECT
ACCESS
ACMP
Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 51) for a list of the displays that can be called up
with the Direct Access function.
50
PSR-2100/1100
Here’s a convenient way to
return to the MAIN display
from any other display:
Simply press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then the
[EXIT] button.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Direct Access Chart
Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below
[TRACK1]
[TRACK2]
[EXTRA TRACKS]
[REPEAT]
[METRONOME]
[REC]
[TOP]
[START/STOP]
[REW]
[FF]
STYLE
[POP & ROCK]
[SWING & JAZZ]
[BALLROOM]
[MARCH & WALTZ]
[BALLAD]
[DANCE]
[LATIN]
[USER]
TRANSPOSE
[E
]
[
]
TEMPO
[E
]
[
]
[TAP TEMPO]
[FADE IN/OUT]
MULTI PAD
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[STOP]
STYLE CONTROL
[ACMP]
[BREAK]
[INTRO]
MAIN [A]
MAIN [B]
MAIN [C]
MAIN [D]
[ENDING/rit.]
[AUTO FILL IN]
[OTS LINK]
[SYNC. STOP]
[SYNC. START]
[START/STOP]
DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR]
[DIGITAL RECORDING]
[MIXING CONSOLE] PSR-2100
PSR-1100
MENU
[DEMO]
[HELP]
[FUNCTION]
[DIRECT ACCESS]
[BALANCE]
[CHANNEL ON/OFF]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
VOICE PART
[MAIN]
[LAYER]
[LEFT]
[MUSIC FINDER]
[EXIT]
[ENTER]
VOICE EFFECT
[LEFT HOLD]
[TOUCH]
[SUSTAIN]
[HARMONY/ECHO]
[MONO]
[DSP]
[VARIATION]
VOICE
[PIANO & HARPSI]
[E.PIANO]
[ORGAN & ACCORDION]
[PERCUSSION]
[GUITAR]
[BASS]
[BRASS]
[WOODWIND]
[STRINGS]
[CHOIR&PAD]
[SYNTH.]
[XG]
[USER]
[ORGAN FLUTES] (PSR-2100 only)
UPPER OCTAVE
[E
]
[
]
MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
[VH TYPE SELECT]
[MIC. SETTING]
[VOCAL HARMONY]
[EFFECT]
[TALK]
ONE TOUCH SETTING
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
REGISTRATION MEMORY
[FREEZE]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[MEMORY]
PEDAL
[PEDAL1]
[PEDAL2]
WHEEL
[PITCH BEND]
[MODULATION] (PSR-2100 only)
SONG
FUNCTION
Corresponding LCD display and function
TRACK1 CHANNEL selection
TRACK2 CHANNEL selection
SONG SETTING
See pages
140
140
140
UTILITY
METRONOME settings
151
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT
SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting
141
CONTROLLER
TUNE
TRANSPOSE assignment
TRANSPOSE settings
144
126
—
—
—
—
—
FUNCTION
E
MIXING CONSOLE
E
FUNCTION
MIDI
MIDI CLOCK setting
148
UTILITY
TAP settings
FADE IN/OUT settings
152
151
MULTI PAD
MULTI PAD EDIT
DIGITAL RECORDING
FUNCTION
MULTI PAD CREATOR
CHORD FINGERING
77
REPEAT/CHORD MATCH settings
FINGERING TYPE selection
VOICE settings
PANPOT settings
VOLUME settings
HARMONIC CONTENT settings
BRIGHTNESS settings
REVERB settings
CHORUS settings
DSP settings
VOLUME/VOICE
MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART)
FILTER
EFFECT
FUNCTION
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT
SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting
122
141
125
126
127
141
—
—
FUNCTION
MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE
MIXING CONSOLE
EQ settings
MASTER TUNING setting
SCALE TUNING setting
138
130
—
FUNCTION
UTILITY
MIDI
LANGUAGE selection
LCD BRIGHTNESS settings
MIDI settings
154
152
148
VOLUME settings
VOICE settings
125
OCTAVE settings
126
Exit from the Direct Access mode
MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART)
VOLUME/VOICE
—
—
MIXING CONSOLE
TUNE
MUSIC FINDER
Return to the MAIN display
MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records)
34
—
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT
CONTROLLER
EFFECT
HARMONY/ECHO
TUNE
EFFECT
SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting
KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment
REVERB settings
PORTAMENTO TIME settings
DSP settings
EFFECT TYPE selection
141
144
127
146
126
127
FUNCTION
VOICE SET settings
146
MIXING CONSOLE
EQ settings
130
FUNCTION
—
—
VOCAL HARMONY EDIT (Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters)
MIC. EFFECT TYPE selection
EFFECT
MIC. REVERB setting
MIC. DSP setting
TALK SETTING
—
—
—
—
FREEZE
REGISTRATION BANK
REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION)
E
VOCAL HARMONY
MIXING CONSOLE
MIC. SETTING
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
FUNCTION
REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE)
PEDAL1 function assignment
CONTROLLER
PEDAL2 function assignment
TUNE
PITCH BEND RANGE settings
CONTROLLER
MODULATION WHEEL settings
131
127
135
145
88
145
142
126
144
PSR-2100/1100
51
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Help Messages
The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-2100/1100.
HELP
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
GUITAR
LAYER
PART
D
I
MENU
DEMO
E
J
STRINGS
LEFT
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
START
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
HELP
EFFECT
ENTER
EXIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
MENU
DEMO
1
TALK
ONE TOUCH SETTING
DIRECT
ACCESS
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
STANDBY
ON
VH TYPE
SELECT
SIGNAL
BALANCE
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
BREAK
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
ACMP
BRASS
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
BASS
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
CHOIR & PAD
USER
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
Help messages can be displayed in
any one of the following languages:
ENGLISH
JAPANESE
GERMAN
FRENCH
SPANISH
ITALIAN
2
FUNCTION
The language can also be selected in
the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”
(page 154) display.
1
2-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2-2
Select the desired
Help topic.
8
Call up the
topic.
Select the Language, if necessary. The
language selected here are also used for
various “Messages” shown during operations.
3
BACK
Selecting a different language here
may cause the following problems.
• Some characters of the file names
you entered may be garbled.
• Files may not be accessible.
Restoring the original language
solves the above problems.
Reading the files on the computer
with a different language system may
cause similar problems to those
above.
NEXT
When two or more pages available,
use this to select different pages.
ENTER
END
Press this to return
to the previous
display.
EXIT
DATA ENTRY
Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual
setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word
(using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to
the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.
52
PSR-2100/1100
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Using the Metronome
The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and
check how a specific tempo sounds.
METRONOME
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
METRONOME
REPEAT
REW
START/STOP
SYNC. START
STYLE
POP & ROCK
BACK
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
MENU
DEMO
TOUCH
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
GUITAR
LAYER
STRINGS
LEFT
RESET
RESET
ACMP
BREAK
INTRO
AUTO
FILL IN
STANDBY
ON
VH TYPE
SELECT
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
SYNC.
START
MIC.
SETTING
SIGNAL
ENTER
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
MAIN
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
STYLE CONTROL
BASS
DSP
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
CHOIR & PAD
USER
TEMPO
E.PIANO
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
PIANO & HARPSI.
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
MAIN
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME] button. Adjust the
tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below).
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.
The sound, volume level,
and the beat (time signature)
of the metronome can all be
changed (page 151).
Adjusting the Tempo
This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of
a song or an accompaniment style.
TAP TEMPO
TEMPO
RESET
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
TOUCH
A
F
B
G
C
H
PART
D
I
MENU
DEMO
E
J
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
MAIN
STANDBY
ON
1
TAP TEMPO
TEMPO
SYNC.
START
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
SIGNAL
BALANCE
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BRASS
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
MULTI PAD
BREAK
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
OVER
STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
ACMP
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
STYLE CONTROL
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
PIANO & HARPSI.
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
2
RESET
Press either the TEMPO [
button or the [ ] button.
E
Press this to
ND close the
TEMPO display.
MEMORY
Songs and accompaniment
styles have been given
default (initial) tempo
settings, designed to best
suit the song/style.
Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ]
[ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
The number in the display indicates how many
quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The
range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,
the faster the tempo.
]
EXIT
When you change the tempo, both tempos of the
current song and style will be changed to the same
tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)
tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ]
buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo
Indications — MAIN display” (page 54) for more
about tempo.
PSR-2100/1100
53
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Tap Tempo
This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.
Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or
the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.
the song or the
1 Playback
accompaniment style
(page 62, 79).
2
TAP TEMPO
TEMPO
RESET
Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice
to change the tempo.
■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display
There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
song (unless the tempo has been
changed manually).
Indicates the current tempo for the
selected song, accompaniment
style or the metronome which is
now playing back. When nothing is
playing back (stopped), this
indicates the tempo for the selected
style. When the song and style are
played back simultaneously, the
tempo of the style is automatically
changed to match the tempo of the
song, and is displayed here. This
tempo is used for recording when
recording a song or
accompaniment style.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
accompaniment style (unless the
tempo has been changed
manually).
54
PSR-2100/1100
Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]
button produces a tapping
sound. You can change this
sound, if desired (page 152).
n
You can also use Tap Tempo
to automatically start the
song or accompaniment
style at the desired tempo.
While both the song and
accompaniment style are
stopped, tap the [TAP
TEMPO] button several
times, and the selected
accompaniment style starts
automatically at the tempo
you tapped. While a song is
set to Sync. Start stand-by
(page 63, 79), tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button starts
the song playback in the
same manner. For songs
and styles in 2/4 and 4/4
time, tap four times; for 3/4
time, tap three times; for 5/4
time, tap five times.
Playing the Demos
The PSR-2100/1100 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic
voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially
prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-2100/1100.
Reference
MENU
DEMO
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
HELP
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
PART
D
I
MENU
DEMO
E
J
LAYER
MIXING CONSOLE
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
ACMP
MAIN
BREAK
1
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STANDBY
ON
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
MENU
DEMO
HELP
FUNCTION
2
2-1
Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.
Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions.
Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices.
Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
2-3
1
2-2
2
Use these to select
different display pages.
3
4
5
6
7
Press one of these buttons to
start the desired demo.
8
Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting
from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only
from the FUNCTION page.
All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one
at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button;
however, all demo songs are played back in sequence.
Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos
(otherwise available in step 3 below).
PSR-2100/1100
55
Playing the Demos
3
For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and
the Demo starts playing.
BACK
This example shows the Sound System
in the FUNCTION demo.
NEXT
n
Press the SONG [START/
STOP] button to stop the
Demo song. To start the
Demo again from the point
at which it was stopped,
press the SONG [START/
STOP] button again.
Rewind and fast-forward
can also be used with the
Demo songs (page 81).
MAIN
F
LAYER
G
H
LEFT
I
J
Select the desired word or item by using the
[DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]
button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.)
to call it up.
EXIT
END
Return to the MAIN screen.
56
PSR-2100/1100
Use the [BACK][NEXT]
buttons in the introduction
screen to call up the previous or next page.
ENTER
Voices
The PSR-2100/1100 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments,
strings and brass — and many, many more.
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
GUITAR
SONG
STRINGS
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
1
METRONOME
REPEAT
CHOIR & PAD
(STYLE)
(L)
(R)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
MENU
DEMO
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
E
MIN
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
CHOIR & PAD
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
MIC.
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
OVER
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
START
BASS
DSP
RESET
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
UPPER OCTAVE
J
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TAP TEMPO
STANDBY
ON
TOUCH
MAIN
PART
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
PIANO & HARPSI.
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
ORGAN FLUTES
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
USER
PERCUSSION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
Selecting a Voice
1
Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call
up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.
MAIN
Turn MAIN on.
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 59 for more
information.)
F
LAYER
You’ll want to hear the
MAIN voice all by itself —
so make sure that the
LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
G
LEFT
H
I
J
2
Select the desired voice group.
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI.
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
BRASS
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
CHOIR & PAD
PERCUSSION
When you select a voice
group, the last selected
voice will automatically be
selected.
ORGAN FLUTES
PSR-2100/1100
57
Voices
3
Indicates that the display is for
selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).
BACK
3-1
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
Select the
memory
location of
the voice
(PRESET/
USER/
FLOPPY
DISK).
Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited
effect and other settings for
that particular voice. You can
disable this so that settings
are not automatically
selected (page 146).
n
You can set how much the
volume of the voice changes
according to your playing
strength (page 144).
n
3-3
Select the voice.
For a list of the available
voices, refer to the separate
Data List.
n
3-2
Select the
various pages
in the current
voice group.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press this to start the
demo of the selected
voice. To stop the demo
at any time, press this
button again.
8
Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.
4
Play the keyboard to hear the
selected
voice.
END
You can set whether the
voice bank and program
change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the
voice name) are displayed or
not (page 152).
n
Press this to return
to the MAIN
EXIT
display.
XG is a major enhancement
of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by
Yamaha specially to provide
more voices and variations,
as well as greater expressive
control over voices and
effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the
future.
Voice Characteristics
The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name.
Live! (PSR-2100 only)
These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of
atmosphere and ambience.
Cool!
These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount
of memory and some very sophisticated programming.
Sweet!
These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so
finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!
Drum
Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the
keyboard.
SFX
Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.
Organ Flutes! (PSR-2100 only)
This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own
original organ sounds.
Keyboard Percussion
When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special
effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and
percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even
though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical.
Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
58
PSR-2100/1100
Voices
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously
The PSR-2100/1100 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining
these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.
MAIN
LAYER
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
PIANO & HARPSI.
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
MENU
DEMO
STRINGS
LEFT
E
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
START
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
SIGNAL
FUNCTION
MAX
AUTO
FILL IN
CHOIR & PAD
ORGAN FLUTES
OVER
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
RESET
MIC.
RESET
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BASS
DSP
LEFT
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
RESET
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
J
TAP TEMPO
TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
E.PIANO
GUITAR
LAYER
USER
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
TOUCH
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
NEXT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
FREEZE
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
MEMORY
Playing a layer of two voices
LAYER part
MAIN part
Playing two voices separately — on the left
and right sections of the keyboard
Split point
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range
Playing three different voices — one on the
left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of
two on the right
Right range
Split point
LAYER part
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range
Right range
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices
1
Press this to
turn the LAYER
function on. To
turn it off, press
the button again.
MAIN
2
Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which you
can select the specific voice you want to play in a
layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a
voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN)
display (page 57).
LAYER
There is an alternate way for
quickly selecting both the
MAIN and LAYER voices
from the panel: While holding down one panel voice
button, press a second
voice button. The first
selected voice becomes the
MAIN voice, and the second
becomes the LAYER.
LEFT
F
G
H
I
J
Press this to
ND return to the
MAIN
display.
E
EXIT
PSR-2100/1100
59
Voices
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard
1
2
Set the LEFT to
ON. Press this
button again to
set it to OFF.
MAIN
Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which
you can select the specific voice you want to play
in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the
way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 57).
LAYER
The split point can be freely
set to any key on the keyboard. (page 141).
n
Each part (MAIN, LAYER,
and LEFT) can have its own
volume setting (page 64).
n
You can also use the LAYER
and LEFT functions
together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this,
set separate voices for the
left and right sections of the
keyboard (as indicated), and
set up a layer of two different
voices on the right.
LEFT
F
G
H
I
J
EXIT
END
Press this to
return to the
MAIN display.
Applying Voice Effects
This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
TOUCH
REW
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
VARIATION
PART
NEXT
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
GUITAR
STRINGS
MIN
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
OTS
LINK
SYNC.
START
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
BASS
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STANDBY
ON
VARIATION
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
J
E
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
DSP
E.PIANO
MAIN
USER
MENU
DEMO
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
VOICE
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
DSP
BACK
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
SUSTAIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.
For explanations on each of the effects, see below.
■ TOUCH
This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no
matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.
■ SUSTAIN
When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You
can also set the Sustain depth (page 93).
■ DSP
The PSR-2100/1100 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you
process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways
— such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to
give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can
completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part
(MAIN/LAYER/LEFT).
60
PSR-2100/1100
The DSP and VARIATION
effect types and the their
depth can be selected and
adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 127).
Voices
■ VARIATION
This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected
type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 127), this lets you switch the rotor speed between
slow and fast.
■ HARMONY/ECHO
This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section
of the keyboard (page 146).
The Portamento effect creates
a smooth pitch glide between
successively played notes.
■ MONO
This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a
time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the
lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last
note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.
Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the
Portamento effect, when playing in legato.
■ LEFT HOLD
This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the
same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when
used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the
auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set
to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall
accompaniment sound.
You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play
over chords by using the
Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main
voice to play polyphonically
and set the Layer voice to
play monophonically
(MONO). In this case, the
melody you play — including
the top notes of any chords
— sounds monophonically.
Try this using the following
voices.
MAIN voice: Brass Section
(polyphonic) + LAYER voice:
Sweet Trump (monophonic)
PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel
Use the PSR-2100/1100 PITCH BEND
wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away
from you) or down (roll the wheel toward
you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH
BEND wheel is self-centering and will
automatically return to normal pitch when
released.
The Modulation function applies a vibrato
effect to notes played on the keyboard (PSR2100). Moving the MODULATION wheel
all the way towards yourself minimizes the
depth of the effect, while rotating it away
from yourself increases it.
PITCH BEND
The maximum pitch bend
range can be changed
(page 126).
MODULATION
In order to avoid accidentally
applying modulation set the
depth to its minimum setting.
Adjusting the Octave setting
The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously
transposed up or down by one octave.
UPPER OCTAVE
RESET
More detailed octave-related
settings for each part can be
made by using the Mixing
Console function
(page 126).
PSR-2100/1100
61
Styles
The PSR-2100/1100 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops,
jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the
selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords
you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
MAIN
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BREAK
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
REW
START/STOP
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
LAYER
PART
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
MENU
DEMO
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
E
J
MIN
MAIN
BREAK
ACMP
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
ENTER
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
CHOIR & PAD
ORGAN FLUTES
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BASS
PERCUSSION
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STANDBY
ON
DSP
E.PIANO
UPPER OCTAVE
TAP TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
START/STOP
MAIN
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
SYNC.
START
OTS
LINK
AUTO
FILL IN
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
Playing a style
1
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
SYNC. START
STYLE
POP & ROCK
BACK
STYLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
BALLROOM
DANCE
LATIN
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
POP & ROCK
A
F
B
G
PART
D
MENU
DEMO
E
STRINGS
USER
BREAK
MAIN
AUTO
FILL IN
STANDBY
ON
SYNC.
START
VOCAL
HARMONY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
PSR-2100/1100
2
3
4
EFFECT
EXIT
1
PART
START/STOP
FREEZE
MEMORY
BACK
1
TALK
ENTER
2
62
MIC.
SETTING
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
VH TYPE
SELECT
SIGNAL
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
USER
RESET
MIC.
OVER
STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
ACMP
UPPER OCTAVE
LATIN
MUSIC
FINDER
RESET
MULTI PAD
STYLE CONTROL
XG
SYNTH.
CHOIR & PAD
MARCH &
WALTZ
WOODWIND
ORGAN FLUTES
DANCE
J
HELP
RESET
BRASS
BASS
I
BALLAD
TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
BALLROOM
GUITAR
LEFT
H
C
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
USER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
LAYER
MARCH &
WALTZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
NEXT
SWING &
JAZZ
5
6
7
8
NEXT
For a list of the available
accompaniment styles,
refer to the separate
Data List.
2-1
Select a location
(Preset, User,
Floppy Disk) for
saving the style.
2-2
Select a Style.
When you've opened a lower directory's
display, this button (UP) lets you call up
the next higher directory, from which you
can select Style groups.
PSR2100_E.book Page 63 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM
Styles
3
When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be
the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)
STYLE CONTROL
BREAK
ACMP
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
4
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
SYNC.
START
You can set the key range
for auto accompaniment
(page 141).
MAIN
BREAK
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
5
As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts.
For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 65.
Split point
The Tempo can be adjusted
using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or
[TAP TEMPO] button.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button, the tempo will adjust to
the same speed that you tapped.
Auto Accompaniment section
6
Stop the style.
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
END
Turn ACMP off.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
INTRO
Sync. Start
Enabling this lets you start
the style simply by playing
the keyboard.
• You can begin the rhythm
channels (tracks) of the
Style by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
• The rhythm channels of
the style can also be
started by tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button.
With the style stopped,
tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button three, four or five
times (three for 3/4 time,
four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,
five for 5/4 time).
When you simultaneously
play back accompaniment
styles with a song, the
accompaniment parts
recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily
replaced by the selected
accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with
the song (page 80).
Accompaniment Style Characteristics
The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.
Session!
These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with
chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of
certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all
songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass
chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.
PSR-2100/1100
63
Styles
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only
1
The Rhythm channels are
part of the styles. Each style
has different rhythm patterns.
Select a style (page 62).
2
You can also start the
rhythm simply by playing a
key on the keyboard, if Sync
Start is enabled (turn on the
[SYNC.START] button).
Rhythm starts.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
MAIN
INTRO
BREAK
ENDING
/ rit.
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
Set to off.
3
Play along with the rhythm playback.
The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that
you tapped.
END
Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button
again to stop the rhythm playback.
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting
BALANCE display
MULTI PAD part
MIC part
Call up the
BALANCE
display.
STYLE part (Auto
Accompaniment section)
SONG part
BALANCE
Parts played from the
keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/
LEFT)
Adjust the output level of the Part.
CHANNEL ON/OFF
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
PART
Call up the
Channel ON/
OFF display.
64
PSR-2100/1100
Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]
button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to
only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for
the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply
press the appropriate channel button again.
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data
(page 160). The channels
are assigned as shown
below.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
PSR2100_E.book Page 65 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM
Styles
Chord Fingerings
The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of
fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 142), and select the Chord Fingerings. The
page shows how to play chords with your left hand.
SINGLE FINGER
Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,
seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section
of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used.
For a major chord, press the root key only.
C
For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key
and a black key to its left.
Cm
For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a white key to its left.
C7
For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the
root key and both a white and black key to its left.
Cm7
MULTI FINGER
The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings,
so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you
want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER
operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the
root of the chord.
FINGERED
This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various
chord types listed on the next page.
FINGERED ON BASS
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note
played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note,
allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C
major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).
FULL KEYBOARD
This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar
to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,
playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord
with your left hand and a melody note with your right.
AI FINGERED
This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three
notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).
Chord detection in the AI
Full Keyboard mode occurs
at approximately 8th-note
intervals. Extremely short
chords — less than an 8th
note in length — may not be
detected.
In Full Keyboard mode,
chords are detected based
on the lowest and second
lowest notes you play. If the
two lowest notes fall within a
single octave, those two
notes determine the chord. If
the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one
octave, the lowest note
becomes the bass and the
chord is determined from the
second lowest note and the
other notes played in the
same octave.
AI
Artificial Intelligence
AI FULL KEYBOARD
When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-2100/1100 will automatically create appropriate
accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to
worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many
songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.
This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the
chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played.
PSR-2100/1100
65
Styles
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)
CmM7
CmM7 9
(
)
(
(
C5
CM7 5
Cm7 9
Cm7 11
)
CM7aug
11
(
Caug
CM7
)
Csus4
CM7 9
CM7
)
C6
)
C9
(
C6 9
C
Cm9
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7 5
CmM7 5
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
C7 13
C7
9
C7 5
C7aug
C7sus4
Normal Voicing
Display for root “C”
Major [M]
1-3-5
C
Ninth [9]
1-2-3-5
C9
Sixth [6]
1 - (3) - 5 - 6
C6
Sixth ninth [69]
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2*
C69
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
CM7
Major seventh [M7]
[M79]
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7
Flatted fifth [ 5]
11
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Augmented [aug]
Major seventh augmented [M7aug]
Minor [m]
Minor ninth [m9]
Minor sixth [m6]
1-4-5
1-3- 5
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
1- 3-5
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7)
Minor seventh [m7]
Minor seventh ninth [m79]
Minor seventh eleventh [m711]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
[mM79]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5]
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5]
Diminished seventh [dim7]
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
Seventh [7]
Seventh flatted ninth [7 9]
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13]
Seventh ninth [79]
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 3 - 5
1 - 3 - 5 - 6
Diminished [dim]
Seventh add thirteenth
]
1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7
CM79
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11
1 - 3 - 5
C 5
1-3- 5-7
CM7 5
1 - 2 - 3 - 5
1 - 3 - 5 - 6
Minor major seventh ninth
11
]
[713]
9
1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2*
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7
1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
Cm9
Cm6
Cm7
Cm79
Cm711
CmM7
CmM79
Cm7 5
CmM7 5
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
C7 9
C7 13
C79
C7 11
C713
C7 9
C7 5
Seventh sharp ninth [7 ]
Seventh flatted fifth [7 5]
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
Seventh augmented [7aug]
C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
1 - 4 - 5 - 7
Suspended second [sus2]
1-2-5
Csus2
PSR-2100/1100
)
• Notes in parentheses can
be omitted.
• For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI
FINGERED, if you play
any three adjacent keys
(including black keys), the
chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm
instruments will continue
playing (Chord Cancel
function). This let you play
back only the rhythm.
• Playing two same root
keys in the adjacent
octaves produces accompaniment based only on
the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment
based on the root and the
fifth.
• The auto accompaniment
Style will sometimes not
change when related
chords are played in
sequence (e.g. some
minor chords followed by
the minor seventh).
• You can also have the
PSR-2100/1100 “teach”
you how to play Fingered
chords. From the CHORD
FINGERING display
(page 142), specify the
chord you want to learn,
and the notes you should
press are indicated in the
display.
C7sus4
* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.
66
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
(
)
)
(
Chord Name [Abbreviation]
Major seventh ninth
Csus2
(
)
11
(
C7
C7 13
C7 9
)
)
(
)
(
C7 9
(
(
)
)
(
)
Cm
Styles
Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)
The PSR-2100/1100 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow
you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By
switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a
professional-sounding arrangement in your performance.
1
2
Select a style (page 62).
2-1
Turn the ACMP function on.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
MAIN
BREAK
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
AUTO
FILL IN
2-3
2-2
3
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
Turn the SYNC. START function on.
Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section
before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.
The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.
Split point
Auto Accompaniment section
4
Main sections can be shifted.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
Press this button to add breaks.
OTS
LINK
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
You can also use this function to play only rhythms
(page 64).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button, you can play back
an Intro section while an
accompaniment is playing.
• Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO],
[MAIN], [ENDING] buttons
LED is green
— The section is not
selected.
LED is red
— The section is currently selected.
LED is off
— No section data; the
section cannot be
played.
• You can dynamically control the level of the
accompaniment by how
softly or strongly you play
the keys in the Auto
Accompaniment section
of the keyboard
(page 141).
• If you press the [SYNC.
START] button while an
accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment
will stop and the PSR2100/1100 will enter Synchronized Start standby
status.
• You can also change
style sections by using
the pedal (page 142).
• The Break section lets
you add dynamic variations and breaks in the
rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even
more professional. If you
press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in
will play back for one
measure.
• The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/
B/C/D) will flash while the
Break is playing.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and the
MAIN [A][B] [C][D] button is pressed after the
final half beat (eighth
note) of the measure, the
fill-in will begin from the
next measure.
PSR-2100/1100
67
Styles
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops
automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.
5
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
Fade-in/Fade-out
The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that
gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,
press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in
before starting the style, press the button again.
To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the
fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 151).
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop
completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released.
Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment
section is played.
1
Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.
2
Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when
SYNC. STOP is turned on.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
3
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
• Styles can also be started
by pressing the STYLE
[START/STOP] button.
• You can select the Intro
and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the
MAIN window (page 69).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button while the ending is
playing, the Intro section
will begin playing after the
ending is finished.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and you
press a MAIN button while
the ending is playing, fill-in
accompaniment will
immediately start playing,
continuing with the Main
section.
• You can begin the accompaniment by using the
Ending instead of the Intro
section. In this case, the
auto accompaniment
doesn’t stop when the
ending is finished.
• If you select a different
style while the style is not
playing, the “default”
tempo for that style is also
selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the
same tempo is maintained
even if you select a different style.
• When STOP ACMP is set
to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you
can play both chords and
bass in the Auto Accompaniment section in the
keyboard (page 141).
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment
starts.
Split point
You can also use the SYNC.
STOP function by pressing
the auto accompaniment
section/left-hand range
briefly (page 141).
Auto Accompaniment section
68
4
The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.
5
Playing a chord with your left
hand automatically restarts the
auto accompaniment.
PSR-2100/1100
END
Press the [SYNC. STOP]/
[SYNC. START] button
again to stop the
accompaniment.
Synchro Stop cannot be set
to on when the fingering
mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Full Keyboard or
the auto accompaniment on
the panel is set to off.
Styles
Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)
1
To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then press
the [EXIT] button.
A
B
C
D
E
2
3
D
E
Select a Intro
Play the style using
the Intro or Ending
section (page 30, 31).
Select a Ending
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when
changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In
1
2
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play
(page 30, 31).
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main
sections.
END
Fill
A short phrase used to add
variation to the style.
To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.
You can also add a fill-in by
pressing the selected MAIN
button again.
You can temporarily disable
Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next
Main section’s button twice
quickly.
PSR-2100/1100
69
Styles
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style
you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
SYNC. START
STYLE
POP & ROCK
BACK
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
MENU
DEMO
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
J
E
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
STANDBY
ON
1
2
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
MIN
ACMP
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STYLE CONTROL
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
TAP TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
Select a style (page 62).
3
Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).
LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected.
ONE TOUCH SETTING
As soon as you play a
chord with your left
hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
Split point
LED is off — No One Touch
Setting data. The button is
not available.
LED is green — The One Touch Setting is not selected.
Auto Accompaniment section
Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected
style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto
Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on.
For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the
separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
4
Stop the Auto Accompaniment.
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
5
START/STOP
Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One
Touch Setting setups (page 71).
ONE TOUCH SETTING
70
SYNC.
START
OTS
LINK
PSR-2100/1100
Styles
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link
The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when
you select a different Main section (A - D).
1
AUTO
FILL IN
END
OTS
LINK
2
When you switch among the Main sections (A
- D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will
be called up automatically.
The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond
to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4,
respectively.
The One Touch Settings
can be set to change with
the sections in one of two
different timings (page 141):
• Immediately when you
press a section button.
• At the next measure (in
an accompaniment
style), after you press a
section button.
To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch
Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
2
1
Select a style.
4
Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].
Set up the panel controls
such as selecting a voice
as required.
3
Press the [MEMORY]
button.
MEMORY
ONE TOUCH SETTING
The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony, Multi Pad and Pedal
END
A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES”
to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 39, 47).
Unless you store the panel
settings here, the registered
settings will be deleted
when you select a different
accompaniment style.
PSR-2100/1100
71
Styles
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder
The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the
instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the
desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice
settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out.
The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and
stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
FF
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
MUSIC
FINDER
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
GUITAR
STRINGS
LEFT
USER
MENU
DEMO
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
J
E
MIN
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
1
2
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
Select a record. For example, select the top
record by pressing the [1▲▼] button to call up
the recommended setups.
The setting data shown here is referred to as a
“record.”
press these buttons to move the cursor
to the next /previous style.
Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons
to move the cursor to the first record.
Play the style (page 63).
PSR-2100/1100
Keep in mind that Music
Finder is a performance aid
in that it automatically finds
appropriate accompaniment
styles and voices for your
playing. Even though you
can specify song titles, it
does not actually contain
song data.
MUSIC
FINDER
All...........................Show all records.
FAVORITE..............Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page.
SEARCH1,2 ...........Show the results by SEARCH function (page 73).
Sorting the records
MUSIC....... The record is sorted by song title.
STYLE .......The record is sorted by style name.
BEAT......... The record is sorted by beat.
TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo.
F
Change the order of the records
(ascending or descending).
G
72
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Select a
record by
song title.
When sorting
records by
song title, use
the [1▲▼] button to skip up
or down
through the
songs alphabetically.
Simulta1
2
3
4
5
6
neously press
the [▲▼] buttons to move
the cursor to
the first
Select a record by style name. When
record.
sorting the records by style name,
3
TALK
SIGNAL
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STANDBY
ON
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
TAP TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
The MUSIC FINDER
records and its contents is
just one example of the recommended panel setups.
You can also create your
own Music Finder settings
for your favorite songs and
genres.
H
I
J
Show the
number of
records of
each page.
7
8
Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page
When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected
data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be
displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to
“FAVORITE” page.
To delete the added record, select the record in the
“FAVORITE” page and press the [H](DELETE
FROM FAVORITE) button.
Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the
MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 73). The results of
SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the “SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2”
page respectively.
Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 74) display (for
editing the selected record).
Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing
the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off
setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).
Records can be selected by
using the [DATA ENTRY]
dial and pressing the
[ENTER] button.
Styles
Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search
You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.
1
Press the [I]
(SEARCH 1)
button or [J]
(SEARCH 2)
button in the
MUSIC FINDER
display.
2
Enter the
conditions for
the search (see
below), then
start search by
using [START
SEARCH] button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Start searching the record.
The results that satisfy all
the conditions appear in the
SEARCH page. For details
about the search settings in
this display, see below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ [A] MUSIC
Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for
inputting the song title.
When you enter the song title (page 48), the search function calls up all
records that contain the entered word or words.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the
keyword.
When you enter the keyword (page 48), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words.
You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search
function finds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.
■ [C] STYLE
Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press
the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This
convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style.
■ [D] BEAT
The STYLE FILE SELECT
display can only be used to
select the style name for
searching; it cannot be used
to call up the actual accompaniment style.
Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.
■ [E] SEARCH AREA
Selects a specific location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2
selections.
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM
You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press
the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.
■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO
You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search.
Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.
■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE
Selects the specific music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any
genres you’ve entered yourself (page 72).
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.
PSR-2100/1100
73
Styles
Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit
From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your
preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records.
1
2
Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.
Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For
details about all settings and operations, see below.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
You can also change/clear a
preset record. To avoid changing/clearing the record, register
the record as a new record
after editing.
All Music Finder records can be
stored together as a single file
(page 154). When calling up a
stored file, a message appears
prompting you to replace or
append the records as desired.
• Replace:
All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are
deleted and replaced with the
records of the selected file.
• Append:
The records called up are
added to the vacant record
numbers.
8
■ [A] MUSIC
Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the
display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for
inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired.
You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma)
between each.
■ [C] STYLE
Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered.
Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button
in the display to select the desired file you want to change/clear/register.
■ [D] BEAT
The STYLE FILE SELECT
display can only be used to
select the style name for
record editing; it cannot be
used to call up the actual
accompaniment style.
Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another file is selected by pressing the
[C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file.
■ [E] FAVORITE
Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 72).
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR
Keep in mind that the Beat
setting made here is only for
the Music Finder search
function; this does not affect
the actual Beat setting of the
accompaniment style itself.
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [I] DELETE RECORD
Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears
prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES ............. Press this to clear the record and close the display.
NO ............. Press this to close the display without clearing the record.
CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
74
PSR-2100/1100
Styles
■ [J] NEW RECORD
Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering.
When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel
the operation.
YES ............. Press this to register the record and close the display.
NO ............. Press this to close the display without registering the record.
CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
The maximum number of
records is 2500 (PSR-2100)/
1200 (PSR-1100), including
internal records.
■ [1▼▲] TEMPO
Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically
changed to that of the changed style.
■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE
Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres
as well as any you’ve entered yourself.
■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME
For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting
the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre
names can be stored.
The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK)
button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button.
If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name
is deleted.
■ [8▲] OK
Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to
execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES ............. Press this to replace the record and close the display.
NO ............. Press this to close the display without replacing the record.
CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.
CAUTION
To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file (page 154). If no saved, the data will
be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 154).
PSR-2100/1100
75
The Multi Pads
The PSR-2100/1100 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences
that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.
Multi Pads
Playing the Multi Pads
1
2
Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 38).
Press any of the Multi Pads.
STOP
MULTI PAD
The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as
soon as the pad is pressed.
The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the
phrase:
• To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.
• To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the
pad or pads you wish to stop.
• Simply tap any of the Multi
Pads at any time to play
back the corresponding
phrase at the currently set
tempo.
• You can even play two,
three, or four Multi Pads at
the same time.
• Pressing the pad during
its playback will stop playing and begin playing from
the top again.
Chord Match
1
2
Turn ACMP on (page 63).
Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.
Split Point
The Chord Match on/off status depends on the selected
Multi Pad Bank.
Auto Accompaniment
section
STOP
MULTI PAD
In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back.
Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.
76
PSR-2100/1100
The Multi Pad
Multi Pad Edit
This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another.
Select the desired Multi Pad(s).
Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 38)
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
The same as the Open/Save
display on pages 44 and 47.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Calls up the upper
level directory page.
8
PSR-2100/1100
77
Song Playback
Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve
recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 95), and commercially available song data. You can use this
highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also
display the music notation (PSR-2100 only) and lyrics in the LCD.
If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have
vocal harmony parts added automatically (page 131).
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
MENU
DEMO
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
GUITAR
LAYER
STRINGS
LEFT
USER
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
SONG
ACMP
STANDBY
ON
BREAK
MIN
EXTRA
TRACKS
MAIN
INTRO
MIC.
(STYLE)
AUTO
FILL IN
TRACK
1
SYNC.
STOP
OTS
LINK
(L)
REC
NEW SONG
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
ENDING
/ rit.
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
FUNCTION
MAX
TRACK
2
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
BASS
DSP
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
PART
START/STOP
2
REPEAT
3
4
5
6
7
METRONOME
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
(R)
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
SYNC. START
Compatible Song Types
• Commercially available song data
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General
MIDI).
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG
format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1”
standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for
multiple effect sections and effect types.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s
DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s
original MIDI file format.
• Songs you recorded (page 95) and stored to the PSR-2100/1100 or disk.
78
PSR-2100/1100
Commercially available
music data is subject to
copyright restrictions, and is
intended only for your own
personal use.
For more information on the
song file types compatible
with the PSR-2100/1100,
see page 161.
Song Playback
Song Playback
Playing the Internal Songs
1
BACK
NEXT
If the MAIN screen (at left) is
not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
2
2-1
2-2
Open a folder and
select a song to be
played back.
3
The song starts.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE)
You can also make a variety
of other settings (such as
tempo, voice selection, etc.)
and have them automatically called up when you
play back the song
(page 107).
BACK
Select the PRESET tab with the
[BACK] button.
NEXT
You can enable the Synchro
Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the
[TOP] button and the
SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as
soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this
function along with the
Style’s Synchro Start function (page 63).
A
F
B
G
n
C
H
You can have the volume
automatically fade in and
fade out at the beginning
and end of the song. Simply
press the [FADEIN/OUT]
button at the start of song
playback to fade in the song,
and press it again at the end
of the song to fade out.
D
I
E
J
END
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
REC
n
TOP
START/STOP
REPEAT
REW
METRONOME
FF
START/STOP
To stop the song immediately, press the
button again.
EXIT
NEW SONG
SYNC. START
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons
(page 53) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.
You can even change the playback speed by tapping out
the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.
Songs can also be played
back continuously. Set
SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON
from the SONG SETTING
display (page 140).
Press the
button in order to go back to the
previous screen.
Make sure that the Language
setting for the instrument
(page 154) is the same as that
of the file name of the song
that you are playing back.
PSR-2100/1100
79
Song Playback
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style
When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you
to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts
of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of
the song’s chord data.
• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON
• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON
1
2
3
4
Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Select the desired accompaniment style.
Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE
section buttons.)
Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.
END
The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped.
Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the
accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.
80
PSR-2100/1100
The accompaniment stops
when you stop the song. If
the accompaniment style is
playing and you start the
song, the accompaniment
automatically stops. However, for internal songs that
use accompaniment styles,
the accompaniment style is
not stopped.
Song Playback
Playing Back Songs on Disk
Before proceeding, make
sure to read the section
“Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disk” (page 7).
Insert the disk into the drive.
n
Insert the disk shutter side
first and label face up.
The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions
(page 79), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.
Other Playback-related Operations
■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward
During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again
from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,
pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
START/STOP
REW
FF
SYNC. START
Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see
below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button.
SONG POSITION display
When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the
beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.
When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the
[REW] and [FF] buttons.
You can set whether or not
the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls up the first
disk song when a disk is
inserted (page 153).
n
Some song data for the PSR2100/1100 has been
recorded with special “free
tempo” settings. During playback of such song data, the
measure numbers shown in
the display will not correspond to the actual measure;
this only serves as a reference as to how much of the
song has been played back.
n
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press
the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the
[REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels
BALANCE
Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 64).
CHANNEL ON/OFF
Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel
by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the
appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press
that channel’s button again.
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown
below for the PSR-2100/
1100.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
PSR-2100/1100
81
Song Playback
Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks
This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you
want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play
that part yourself.
1
Select the song to be played back (page 78).
You can change the channel
assignments for Track 1 and
Track 2 (page 140), letting
you specify which parts are
muted when pressing the
[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/
[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.
Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts
(all but the right hand/left hand).
2
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
METRONOME
REPEAT
Use this button to turn on/off
the right-hand part.
All tracks are automatically
set to on when selecting a
different song.
Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.
Start the song.
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [
3
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
START/STOP
REW
][
] buttons (page 53).
END
START/STOP
FF
To stop the song, press the
button again.
SYNC. START
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range
This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.
1
Play back the song (page 79, 81).
2
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REPEAT
You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by
pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired
end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.
METRONOME
Press this button at the point you want
the repeating phrase to start (Point A).
Press this button at the point you want
the repeating phrase to end (Point B).
Point B cannot be selected
unless Point A has been
selected first.
n
3
4
After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from
point A to point B is played back repeatedly.
Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]
button returns to point A.
Stop the song.
START/STOP
END
REPEAT
To cancel the Repeat function, press the
button again.
82
PSR-2100/1100
Specifying only Point A
results in repeat playback
between Point A and the
end of the song.
n
The specified A and B
points will be erased when
selecting a different song
number, cancelling the
Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode
— such as Phrase Repeat
or repeat in Song Chain
Play (page 136).
Song Playback
Displaying Music Notation — Score
With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used
with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.
1
Select the
desired song
(page 79, 81).
2
If the MAIN screen (at left)
is not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
A
B
C
D
E
The displayed notation is
generated by the PSR2100/1100 based on the
song data. As a result, it
may not be exactly the
same as commercially
available sheet music of the
same song — especially
when displaying notation of
complicated passages or
many short notes.
3
n
Some song data for the
PSR-2100/1100 has been
recorded with special "free
tempo" settings. For such
song data, the tempo, beat,
measure and music
notation will not displayed
correctly.
Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range.
Depending on other settings, this parameter may
be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is
the case, go to the detailed setting display (shown
below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT
CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or,
go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function
menu (page 136) and set the TRACK 2 parameter
to any channel except “OFF.”
n
[RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot
be turned off at the same
time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range.
Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1]
is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display
(page 140).
Enables/disables display of the lyrics.
If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed.
Enables/disables display of the chords.
If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords
are not displayed.
Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).
Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.
SMALL...... Notation is shown in small size.
LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size.
This calls up the detailed setting display for notation.
For details, see the next page.
8
n
The note name is indicated
at the left of the note. When
the space between the
notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the
top left of the note.
n
You can increase the number of measures that will be
displayed by decreasing the
other items to be displayed
(parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).
n
When accidentals (sharp
and flats) and notes cannot
be displayed on one line,
they are displayed in the
next line from the middle of
the measure.
n
The notation functions cannot be used to create song
data by inputting notes. For
information on creating
song data, see page 99.
PSR-2100/1100
83
Song Playback
Detailed Settings for Notation
When “LEFT” and “RIGHT”
are set to the same channel,
the notation of the right-hand
notes and left-hand notes
are displayed in piano format
(two connected staves).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH
This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part).
This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected.
AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts
to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the
Function menu (page 140).
1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specified channel, 1- 16.
OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.
■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE
This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when
the selected song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation.
For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the chart below.
Key Signatures and Accidentals
C Maj (A min)
G Maj (E min)
D Maj (B min)
A Maj (F min)
E Maj (C min)
B Maj (G min)
F Maj (D min)
C Maj (A min)
G Maj (E min)
D Maj (B min)
A Maj (F min)
E Maj (C min)
B Maj (G min)
F Maj (D min)
The
note indicates the root note of the major key, and the
C Maj (A min)
note indicates the root of the relative minor.
■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE
This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct
the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure
to select the smallest note value which is used in the song.
Note resolution:
1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note
triplet, 1/32 note triplet
84
PSR-2100/1100
Short notes and ornamented
notes (such as trills and
grace notes) which are
shorter than the Note resolution will not be displayed in
the notation.
Song Playback
■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME
Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 83) is set to ON.
ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).
Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 52).
English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti
French .............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Japanese...........
Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to
the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol
would be indicated as Do.
As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.
■ [8▲] OK
This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also
execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.
■ [8▼] CANCEL
You can select the display
pages (one before and after)
by the using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons or the pedal
(page 142).
This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also
execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button on the panel.
PSR-2100/1100
85
Song Playback
Displaying the Lyrics
This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your
performance or song playback.
* Microphone input is available only on the PSR-2100.
1
Select the
desired song
(page 79, 81).
2
The language used for lyrics display depends on the
particular lyric data. If the
lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you can remedy this
by changing the “LYRICS
LANGUAGE” setting from
the SONG SETTING display (page 140).
A
B
C
D
E
3
If the selected song does
not contain lyric data, lyrics
are not displayed.
In this example, select
“Lyrics” in the Function
folder of the PRESET
(SONG) page.
If the selected song
contains chord data, chord
names are displayed with
the lyrics.
4
SONG
Start the song.
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
5
The lyrics are
in reverse
display along
with song
playback.
END
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE)
START/STOP
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
NEW SONG
REW
TOP
START/STOP
REPEAT
PSR-2100/1100
FF
METRONOME
REW
FF
SYNC. START
Stop the song.
To return to the previous page, press the
button.
86
METRONOME
SYNC. START
TRACK
2
REC
REPEAT
EXIT
The lyrics can be changed
(page 110).
PSR2100_E.book Page 87 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-2100/1100 just as you want — selecting specific
voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those
settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
LAYER
PART
D
I
MENU
DEMO
E
J
LEFT
RESET
FREEZE
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
XG
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
AUTO
FILL IN
VH TYPE
SELECT
SIGNAL
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
STANDBY
ON
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
REGISTRATION MEMORY
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
HELP
RESET
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
TAP TEMPO
MIN
BASS
DSP
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
MEMORY
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory
This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the
settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you.
1
Set up the panel controls as desired.
For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List
(Parameter Chart).
Keep in mind that songs,
styles or multi pads on disk
cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want
to register a disk-based
song, style or multi pad,
copy the relevant data to
“USER” in the SONG/
STYLE/MULTI PAD display (page 39) and register
the data separately.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
2
FREEZE
MEMORY
3
Cancels the registration
and returns to the MAIN
display. You can also use
the [EXIT] button.
F
Select the desired parameter groups
for the settings you want to register.
You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]
dial to navigate in this display. To
register a parameter group, checkmark
the corresponding box. Groups left
without checkmarks will not be included
in the Registration Memory setting.
This allows you to maintain certain
settings, even when switching among
Registration Memory presets. You can
also use the Freeze function (page 89)
to override the Registration Memory
changes — letting you prevent certain
panel settings from being changed.
Press the desired
ND number button for
registering the settings.
E
G
H
I
J
Enters a checkmark to the
selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Removes the checkmark from
the selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected.
Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.
Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered.
To delete all currently registered settings at one
time, simultaneously hold
down the highest B key on
the keyboard and turn on
the power.
For information on saving the settings registered here, refer to the next page.
PSR-2100/1100
87
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups
The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file.
All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The
banks can be saved to “USER” or
“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration
bank files.
BANK 01
Keep in mind that the size of
the Registration bank files
and the memory space they
occupy depends on the
amount of functions set in
each.
Press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button and [EXIT]
button to call up the MAIN
display.
1
F
G
H
I
J
2
Save the settings you’ve
made to the
Registration Memory
buttons as a single
Registration bank file
(page 47).
The REGISTRATION EDIT display
appears. For details on this display,
see below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION EDIT display
The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The
names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant
REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.
From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.
Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]
buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on
(indicator is red).
Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 44) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 46) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Save the result of the Name/Delete operation by returning to the REGISTRATION BANK display and pressing
the [8▼] (UP) button.
88
PSR-2100/1100
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup
You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you
de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you
change the Registration Memory preset.
Recalling the Registered Settings
Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 88).
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are
green) to recall the desired settings.
You can program your
Registration Memory presets
to be called up in sequence,
in any order you desire.
Once programmed, the
presets 1 - 8 can be selected
in sequence with the
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or
the pedal (page 145).
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Selecting the Freeze Settings
1
2
MENU
DEMO
HELP
FUNCTION
Call up the “FREEZE”
page from the
REGIST.SEQUENCE/
FREEZE/VOICE SET
screen (page 145).
Enters a checkmark
to the selected box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Removes the
checkmark from the
selected box.
Select the Freeze settings.
3
Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze
page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
4
MEMORY
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the
desired settings.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE
MEMORY
PSR-2100/1100
89
Editing Voices — Sound Creator
The PSR-2100/1100 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices
by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can
save it as a USER voice for future recall.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
MENU
DEMO
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
E
J
MIN
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
OTS
LINK
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
OVER
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
STOP
MULTI PAD
STANDBY
ON
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
TAP TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• The Voice can be edited in
realtime while playing
back a song/style.
• Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much
change in the actual
sound depending on the
original settings of the
voice.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Operation
1
Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the
Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the
voice you wish to edit.
2
Press the
[SOUND
CREATOR]
button.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
F
G
H
DIGITAL RECORDING
I
J
MIXING CONSOLE
The voice can also be
selected in the SOUND
CREATOR display.
CAUTION
The settings are lost if the
edited part's voice is
switched to another voice.
Important data should be
saved to User Drive or
floppy disk.
PART
3
Edit the voice parameters.
The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 92 (Regular
Voice), and page 94 (Organ Flutes).
Select the desired menu by
pressing the [NEXT]/
[BACK] button.
REGULAR VOICE
Indicates the
parameters available
for editing in this
display. These
correspond to the
parameters/values
shown at the bottom
of the display.
Can be used during editing to compare
the sound of the original voice with the
edited voice.
Select the desired menu.
The selected menu is highlighted.
4
90
Save the edited voice to the USER drive
(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 47).
PSR-2100/1100
ORGAN FLUTES (PSR-2100 only)
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Select or adjust the parameters.
Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving
the edited voice as a User voice (page 47).
5
Press the [USER] button to select the
edited voice, and play the keyboard.
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
Regular Voice Parameters
COMMON
Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.
SOUND
Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice.
EFFECT/EQ (PSR-2100)
EFFECT (PSR-1100)
Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.
HARMONY
Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.
Keep in mind that there are
certain parameters whose
Sound Creator settings
affect only the Main part’s
voice.
The parameter for Organ Flute, see page 94
The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.
Common parameter
Other location
MONO
VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 61
PORTAMENTO TIME
MIXING CONSOLE
page 126
FILTER BRIGHTNESS
MIXING CONSOLE
page 126
FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT
MIXING CONSOLE
page 126
REVERB DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 127
CHORUS DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 127
DSP ON/OFF
VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 60
DSP DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 127
DSP TYPE/VARIATION
MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 61,127
EQ LOW/GAIN
MIXING CONSOLE
page 124
EQ HIGH/GAIN
MIXING CONSOLE
page 124
HARMONY/ECHO TYPE
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
HARMONY/ECHO SPEED
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 146
COMMON
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.
Set the volume of the current edited
voice.
Determines the touch sensitivity, or
how greatly the volume responds to
your playing strength.
0.........Produces more dramatic
level drops, the more softly
you play.
64.......Normal response.
127.....Produces high volume for
any playing strength (fixed)
Set the portamento time of each
part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)
(page 126).
This determines whether the voice
is played monophonically (page 61).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shift the octave range of the
selected voice up or down in
octaves. When the Main or Layer
part’s voice is used, the M/LYR
parameter is available; when the
Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT
parameter is available.
PSR-2100/1100
91
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATORSOUND
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determines the filter, EG, and
vibrato settings (see below).
8
■ FILTER
FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a
certain frequency range.
• BRIGHTNESS
Determines the cutoff frequency or
effective frequency (resonance) range of
the filter (see diagram). Higher values
result in a brighter sound.
Volume
Cutoff frequency
These frequencies are
“passed” by the filter.
• Harmonic Content
Determines the emphasis given to the
cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS
above (see diagram). Higher values result
in a more pronounced effect.
In addition to making the
sound either brighter or
more mellow, Filter can be
used to produce electronic,
synthesizer-like effects.
Frequency
(pitch)
Cutoff range
Volume
Resonance
Resonance
Frequency
(pitch)
■ EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce
many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion
sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.
• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum
level after the key is played. The higher the value, the
slower the attack.
Level
• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain
level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher
the value, the slower the decay.
ATTACK
Key on
• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after
the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.
92
PSR-2100/1100
DECAY
RELEASE
Time
Key off
If RELEASE is set to a large
value, the sustain becomes
long.
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR■ VIBRATO
• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.
VIBRATO
Creates a wavering in the
sound by periodically changing the pitch.
• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).
• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the
playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see
diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato
onset.
SPEED
Level
DEPTH
DELAY
Time
EFFECT/EQ
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.
Determines the DSP type.
For information on the effect
structure, see page 129; for a list of
available effect types, refer to the
separate Data List.
Determines the Frequency and
Gain of the Low and High EQ
bands (PSR-2100 only).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The same as the “Mixing Console”
on page 127.
Determines the Sustain depth
of each voice when the
[SUSTAIN] button is set to on.
HARMONY
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.
The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 147.
PSR-2100/1100
93
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)
In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category, the PSR-2100/1100 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice.
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.
Adjust the Footage.
■ Parameters
Organ Type
This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage.
Rotary SP Speed
The Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker
speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “DSP Type” below), and the
VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the
VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button).
Vibrato On/Off
This ([G]) button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF.
Vibrato Depth
Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth ([H]) button. The button sequentially selects a
depth of “1”, “2”, or “3”.
Footage
The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes.
The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound
is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound.
Hence, the 16’ setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1’ setting
determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume
of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own
distinctive organ sounds.
Volume (VOL)
Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.
Response (RESP)
The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increasing or
decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The
higher the value the slower the swell and release.
Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED)
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.
Mode
The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is
applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any
subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all
notes.
Attack (4’, 2 2/3’, 2’)
The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4’, 2 2/3 ‘and 2’
controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the
graphic bar the greater the attack sound.
Length (LENG)
The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay
immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay.
Reverb Depth
Chorus Depth
DSP on/off
DSP Depth
For details about the digital effects, see pages 60, 127.
DSP Type
Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the
seven available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is selected, the Rotary SP Speed
([C]) button in the FOOTAGE/VOL/ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will
have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button.
Variation
EQ Low
EQ High
94
PSR-2100/1100
Variation
Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is
selected (when the Voice Set function is ON — page 146).
Value
Sets the DSP variation parameter value (e.g., “LFO Freq” for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP
variation is turned on.
The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
— Song Creator
With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store
them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 96), which lets you
record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 97), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording
(page 99), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard
performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects, vocal harmony and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song
can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 38, 47).
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
STYLE
POP & ROCK
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
MENU
DEMO
E
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
MAIN
BREAK
SONG
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BASS
DSP
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
J
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
DIGITAL RECORDING
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
START/STOP
REPEAT
REW
METRONOME
FF
SYNC. START
About Song Recording
There are two methods of recording songs: realtime recording and step recording.
■ Realtime Recording
This method lets you record performance data in real time. There are two ways to use
realtime recording: Quick and Multi.
Quick Recording (page 96)
This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano
song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand
and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your
right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right
hand and the auto accompaniment.
Multi Recording (page 97)
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create
the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument
individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over
an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance.
■ Step Recording (page 99)
This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event
at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual recording method — similar to writing
music notation onto paper. By using the Event List (page 108-110), you can input
notes, chords and other events one by one.
■ Song Editing (page 105)
The PSR-2100/1100 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick
Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.
When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded song, use the Punch
IN/OUT function (page 104).
• The internal memory capacity of
the PSR-2100/1100 is about
1520KB (PSR-2100)/700KB (PSR1100). Memory capacity for 2DD
and 2HD floppy disks is about
720KB and 1.44MB, respectively.
When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-2100/
1100 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together.
• The microphone input signal (PSR2100 only) cannot be recorded.
• Songs recorded on the PSR-2100/
1100 are automatically recorded as
SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0)
data. For details on SMF, see
page 161.
• Playback of the recorded song
data can be transmitted from MIDI
OUT, letting you play the sounds of
a connected external tone generator (page 149).
• The volume level of each channel
of the song can be adjusted from
the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even
after you’ve set a voice for your
keyboard play during recording,
you can record voice selections, so
that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 107).
PSR-2100/1100
95
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Quick Recording
This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so
you can check your progress.
CAUTION
If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 39, 47).
If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased.
■ When creating a new song:
1
REC
NEW SONG
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
SYNC. START
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
1
Select the desired song (page 79, 81).
2
Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.
If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.
Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.
3
To record without specifying a particular track, press the [REC] button.
In this case, your performance will be recorded automatically to TRACK 1.
To specify the track for recording, simultaneously hold down the [REC] button
and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record.
You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the
same time.
• Specifying the recording track
To record your keyboard performance:
Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.
To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance:
EXTRA TRACK
TRACK
Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.
REC
TRACKS
2
1
To stop recording, press
the [REC] button again.
4
(STYLE)
(L)
(R)
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE
[START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by
pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop
function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142).
END
To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.
Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song
start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142).
If the “LAYER” or “LEFT” button is on before pressing the
REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts are
automatically recorded to different channels.
The performance of track 1/2
is recorded to the channel
specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 140).
You can overdub a second
right-hand performance onto
Track 2 after recording the
first right-hand performance
(including the layer voices)
on Track 1. To do this, set the
[LEFT] button to OFF and
repeat steps 2 and 3.
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] button again.
You can also use the metronome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
■ Play back your new song
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and
press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 108).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 47).
96
PSR-2100/1100
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Multi Recording
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of
a full band or orchestra.
The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.
Channels
Parts
(default settings)
1
Voice MAIN
2
Voice MAIN
3
Voice MAIN
4
Voice MAIN
5
Voice MAIN
6
Voice MAIN
7
Voice MAIN
8
Voice MAIN
Available parts
Channels
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Multi Pad1
Multi Pad2
Multi Pad3
Multi Pad4
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Parts
(default settings)
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style
BASS
Accompaniment style
CHORD1
Accompaniment style
CHORD2
Accompaniment style
PAD
Accompaniment style
PHRASE1
Accompaniment style
PHRASE2
Available parts
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Multi Pad1
Multi Pad2
Multi Pad3
Multi Pad4
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
About the accompaniment style parts
Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.
Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.
Chord ........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.
Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.
Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
CAUTION
If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 39, 47).
If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased.
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
■ When creating a new song:
1
REC
NEW SONG
2
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
1
SYNC. START
Select the desired song (page 79, 81).
Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously
holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.
REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel
ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel
OFF......................... Mutes the channel
To cancel or disable
REC
recording, press the
[REC] button once
again.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The part is automatically
selected when setting the
several channels to “REC” at
the same time.
8
PSR-2100/1100
97
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
3
Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.
This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the
accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the
recording channels
selected in step #2.
For a list of the initial
default assignments,
see page 97.
C
D
4
5
6
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the
SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The
recording can be started/stopped by pressing the
foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is
set to the pedal (page 104).
To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.
You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the
recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 104).
A single part (with the
exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several
channels.
The settings of the recorded
parts is stored temporarily
until you execute Quick
Recording, select a song, or
turn the power off.
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] button again.
Play back your new song.
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the
beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]
button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the
beginning of the song.
END
98
When selecting the MIDI
part
• Setting a single channel
to MIDI
All incoming data received
via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded.
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you
record without having to
set the MIDI transmit
channel on the external
device.
• Setting several channels
to MIDI
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records
data only over the set
MIDI channel — meaning
the external device must
also be set to the same
channel.
To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.
You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them
while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a
finished song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)
displays (page 108).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store
the recorded data (page 38, 47).
PSR-2100/1100
You can also use the metronome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record
This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is
also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.
Operation
1
Select an existing song (page 79, 81) to which
you want to add parts or re-record. If you want
to create a new song, simultaneously press the
[REC] button and the [TOP] button.
3
Press the [A] button to call up the Song
Creator display.
A
2
B
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
C
D
E
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4
Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons, select the “1-16”
tab for recording melodies
and other parts, or select
the “CHD” (Chord) tab for
recording chords, and after
selecting the “1 - 16” tab,
select a record channel
with the [F] (CH) button.
BACK
NEXT
F
G
H
I
J
5
Call up the Step Record
display by pressing the
[G] button.
F
Any voice, effect and other
settings you make in the
Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you
call up the CHD (Chord)
page.
G
H
I
J
The voices in the USER and
FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step
recording. You can select
voices from the PRESET
page; however, these may
sound slightly different from
the original voice.
PSR-2100/1100
99
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
6
First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display,
then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.
Moves the cursor position
up and down.
Returns the cursor to the
beginning of the song (the
first note of the first
measure).
Use these to move the
selected event, in units of
measures (BAR), beat, and
clocks. For information on
measure/beat/clock settings,
see below.
END
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth
notes are available only when recording the melody.)
This also determines the position to which the pointer
will advance after a note has been entered.
Determines the velocity
(loudness) of the note to be
entered (only when recording
the melody). For information
on velocity settings, see below.
Determines the length of the
note (as a percentage) from
the position at which it is to be
entered. (This is available only
when recording the melody.)
For information on gate time
settings, see below.
Each press of this button toggles
among the three basic note
selectors at the bottom of the
display: normal, dotted, and triplet.
(This is available only when
recording the melody.)
8
Deletes the event at the cursor.
To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded
data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 47).
■ Bar/Beat/Clock
Bar
1
Beat
Clock
1
2
2
3
4
1
000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919
2
3
4
000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919
■ Velocity
The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.
Kbd. Vel
Actual
playing
strength
fff
ff
f
mf
mp
p
pp
ppp
127
111
95
79
63
47
31
15
■ Gate Time
The following settings are available:
Normal .......................
80%
Tenuto ........................
99%
Staccato......................
40%
Staccatissimo ..............
20%
Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
100
PSR-2100/1100
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)
In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by
guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100.
1
1-1
1-2
Select this note.
1-3
2
While holding down this note...
...press this (to input a tie).
The notation display on the instrument (PSR-2100) may not be accurate,
especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation displayed
accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] button, and input
the notes as desired.
2-2
2-3
2-1
Select this note.
3
Select this note.
Selecting a note enters a rest of the equivalent value. For example, selecting an eighth note
( ) here results in a eighth note rest (
).
4
5
4-1
Press this button to display the dotted notes.
4-3
4-2
Select this note.
5-1
Call up the normal notes by pressing this button.
5-3
5-2
Select this note.
To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.
■ Play back the newly created melody
Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button
to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be
edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 108).
PSR-2100/1100
101
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step
Record (Chord)
The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with
precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord
changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100.
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)
For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.
MAIN A
C
1
BREAK
F
G
F
MAIN B
G7
Enter the chords by using the currently
selected chord fingering method in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
C
Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A
C
MAIN
F
C
001:1:000
F
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
2
G
001:3:000
G
002:1:000
Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A
BREAK
C
INTRO
BREAK
F
G
F
002:3:000
G7
002:4:000
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
102
PSR-2100/1100
F
G7
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
3
Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.
MAIN A
BREAK
MAIN B
MAIN
C
F
G
F
G7
C
C
003:1:000
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
■ Play back the newly created chord progression
Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the
recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG
CREATOR (CHD) display (page 109). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the
SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.
To enter a fill-in, press the
[AUTO FILL IN] button and
press one of the MAIN [A]–
[D] buttons.
END Mark
An “END” mark is shown in
the display, indicating the
end of the song data.
The actual position of the
End mark differs depending
on the section that is input at
the end of the song. When
an Ending section is input,
the End mark automatically
follows the Ending data.
When a section other than
Ending is input, the End
mark is set two measures
after the final section.
The End mark can be freely
set to any position desired.
PSR-2100/1100
103
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out — Rec Mode
From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.
To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation
steps 1 - 3 on page 99.
These settings determine how recording will
start.
Normal
Overwrite recording starts when you press
the SONG [START/STOP] button or when
you play the keyboard with Synchro standby
set to ON.
F
G
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save the
edited data.
H
First Key On
Overwrite recording starts as soon as you
start playing the keyboard. This setting also
preserves the previous lead-in data, letting
you record over the original lead-in without
erasing it.
I
J
Determines the Punch Out
measure — the measure at
which Punch In overwrite
recording stops (when
“PUNCH OUT AT” is
selected).
Punch In At
The song plays back normally up to the
indicated Punch In measure (set by the
[3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite
recording at that Punch In measure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the measure at which Punch
In overwrite recording starts (when
“PUNCH IN AT” is selected).
These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data.
Replace All
This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out
This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out At
Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),
then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.
When this is set to ON, you
can use the foot pedal 2 to
control the punch-in and
punch-out points. (The current
function assignment of the
foot pedal is cancelled.) Press
and hold down the foot pedal
to record. Recording stops
when you release the pedal.
About Punch In/Out
This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The
illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.
REC START setting
REC END setting
NORMAL
REPLACE ALL
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT AT=006
FIRST KEY ON
REPLACE ALL
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT AT=006
PUNCH IN AT=003
REPLACE ALL
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT AT=006
104
PSR-2100/1100
Original data
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
8
5
*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not
overwritten, recording starts
from measure 3.
*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]
button at the end of 5 measures.
Deleted
5
6
7
8
7
8
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start/start overwrite recording *1
Start/
play back original data
7
Stop recording *2
Start/start overwrite recording *1
1
6
Stop recording *2
Start/start overwrite recording *1
1
5
2
3
4
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
3
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
Deleted
Stop recording *2
4
5
6
7
8
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start overwrite recording
2
5
Stop recording *2
Start overwrite recording
2
Deleted
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start overwrite recording
2
5
Stop recording *2
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
6
Stop recording *2
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
5
4
5
6
7
8
Previously recorded data
Newly recorded data
Deleted data
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Editing a Recorded Song
Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing
features to change the song data.
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel
Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons.
Quantize
Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following
musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.
Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead
of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to
the specified note value (see below).
Use this to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Quantize
operation. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Quantize
results. The Undo function
only has one level; only the
previous operation can be
undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Determines how strongly the
notes will be quantized. If a
value less than 100% is
selected, notes will be
moved toward the specified
quantization beats only by
the specified amount.
Applying less than 100%
quantization lets you
preserve some of the
“human” feel in the
recording.
Selects the quantize size (resolution).
See the below for the details.
Selects the desired channel
to be quantized.
■ About Quantize Size
Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the
data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4
note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.
One measure of eighth notes before quantization
After 1/8 note quantization
Quantize Size
1/4 note
1/4 note triplet
1/8 note
1/8 note triplet
1/16 note
1/16 note triplet
1/32 note
1/8 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/16 note +
1/16 note triplet *
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different
note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes
and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to
straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,
both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.
PSR-2100/1100
105
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Delete
This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Deletes all data in the
selected channel. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
These select the channel
to be deleted.
8
Mix
This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the
data from one channel to another.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Mix operation.
After the operation is
completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting
you restore the original data
if you’re not satisfied with
the Mix results. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
These let you specify the two
source channels to be mixed.
4
5
6
7
PSR-2100/1100
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
8
Determines the channel into which the
mix or copy results will be placed.
If “COPY” is selected here, the data
from Source 1 is copied to the
Destination channel.
106
All data other than the mixed
note data is derived from the
Source 1 channel.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Channel Transpose
This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in
semitone increments.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Channel
Transpose operation. After
the operation is completed,
this button changes to
[UNDO], letting you restore
the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Channel
Transpose results. The
Undo function only has one
level; only the previous
operation can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Toggles between the two
channel displays: Channels
1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.
To simultaneously set all
channels to the same value,
adjust the Channel
Transpose for one of the
channels while holding
down this button.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel.
Set Up
You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing
console or panel controls.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the SET
UP operation. Once
SET UP has been
executed, the
operation cannot be
cancelled or undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Use this to checkmark the
selected item.
Checkmarked items are
stored with the song.
Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception
of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.
Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the
[TOP] button, and stop playback.
Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.
Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song.
Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played
part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE)
button.
Lyrics language.......... Stores the settings of the Lyrics display.
Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display (PSR-2100 only).
Mic. Settings ............... Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console (PSR-2100 only).
PSR-2100/1100
107
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16
From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on
page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
Use these to move the
cursor up/down and select
the desired event.
Determines the channel to
be edited.
A
F
Returns to the beginning
position of the current song
(the first note of the first
measure).
B
G
C
H
D
I
Use these to move the
cursor left/right and select
the desired parameter of
the highlighted event.
E
J
Calls up the Step Recording
display (page 100).
Calls up the Filter display
(page 110), letting you select
only the events you wish to
shown in the Event List.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Holding this button down
while using the [A] and [B]
buttons lets you select
multiple events.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pastes all cut or copied events to
the selected location.
Determines the current
position of the event being
edited.
For coarse adjustment of the event
For fine adjustment of the event value.
Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events
are copied and can be pasted to another location.
Adds a new event to the Event List.
If the value at the cursor has been
changed, pressing this restores the
original value.
Copies all selected events. The
copied events can be pasted to
another location.
Deletes the
event at the
cursor position.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] button.
Note Events
Parameter
Note
Ctrl (Control change)
Prog (Program change)
P.Bnd (Pitch bend)
A.T. (After touch)
Description
Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.
Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the
separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to
the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).
Determines the pitch bend value.
Determines the after touch value.
The sound of the voices
recorded with Step recording
may sound slightly different
from the original.
108
PSR-2100/1100
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Editing Chord Events — CHD
From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events
(page 108).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Press this to convert the
recorded chord and section
entries into song data.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] button.
Chord Events
Parameter
Style (Accompaniment
style)
Tempo
Chord
Sect (Section)
OnOff (Channel on/off)
CH.Vol (Channel volume)
S.Vol (Style volume)
Description
Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select
the desired style.
Determines the tempo value.
Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.
Specifies the section — its name and variation.
Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.
Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).
Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.
Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)
From this display, you can edit recorded System events.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The
operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 108).
System Events
Parameter
Description
ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the
music notation. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data.
Tempo
Determines the tempo value.
Time (Time signature)
Determines the time signature.
Key
Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.
XG Prm (XG parameters)
Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the
separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
Meta (Meta event)
Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
PSR-2100/1100
109
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Inputting and Editing Lyrics
This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct
already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to
step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as
those in Editing Note Events (page 108).
In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 79 and 86.
1
Move the cursor
to the event
containing the
lyric “star.”
2
Move the cursor to
the word “star.”
3
Use these buttons to call up
the Lyric display, from
which you can input lyrics.
From the Lyric display
(page 48), enter the new
word, “(your name).”
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
Press this button
to save the newly
changed lyric
data.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] button.
8
Lyrics Events
Parameter
Name (Song name)
Lyrics
Code (Other controls)
Description
Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.
Allows you to enter lyrics.
CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.
LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.
Customizing the Event List — Filter
This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for
display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,
remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.
To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or
LYRICS (page 108 - page 110).
Calls up the Main Filter
display. For more
information on each event
type, refer to the separate
Data List booklet (MIDI
Data Format).
Calls up the Control
Change Filter display. For
more information on each
event type, refer to the
separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
END
Execute the settings by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
110
PSR-2100/1100
Selects only note data;
checkmarks for all other
boxes are removed.
Reverses the checkmark
settings for all boxes. In
other words, this enters
checkmarks to all boxes that
were previously un-checked
and vice versa.
Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display.
For more information on each event type,
refer to the separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
EXIT
Enters checkmarks for all
items.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Enters/removes the checkmark
for the selected item.
Selects the item, scrolling up/
down one item at a time.
When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the
item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”
is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just
as with the preset styles.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
DIGITAL RECORDING
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
MENU
DEMO
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
ACMP
STANDBY
ON
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
ACMP
CHANNEL ON/OFF
AUTO
FILL IN
BRASS
RESET
MIC.
STYLE CONTROL
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BASS
CHOIR & PAD
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
DSP
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
BREAK
7
8
EXIT
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
INTRO
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
SYNC.
START
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
MEMORY
About Creating Accompaniment Styles
The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section
of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to
the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.
Section
Channel
INTRO A - D
MAIN A - D
■ Realtime Recording (page 113)
FILL IN A - D
You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the
keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself
— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the
style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your
own custom style.
BREAK
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
BASS, CHORD 1,
CHORD 2, PAD,
PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2
ENDING A - D
For information on the part
structure of accompaniment
styles, see page 97.
Realtime Recording Characteristics
• Loop recording
Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can
also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two
measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you
record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.
• Overdub recording
This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the
original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For
example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record
notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new
material while hearing the previous parts.
■ Step Recording (page 114)
This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows
you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is
ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are
difficult to play.
■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 115)
This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining
various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For
example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you
could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass
pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8
Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one
accompaniment style.
8Beat 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
60’s 8 Beat
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Chord 2
8Beat 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 116)
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Any voice can be selected for
the RHY1 channel, with the
exception of Organ Flutes.
With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve
created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.
PSR-2100/1100
111
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Style File Format
These are the patterns
recorded to the
accompaniment styles
(page 119).
Source Pattern
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into
a single unified format. By using the edit
functions, you can take full advantage of the
SFF format and freely create your own styles.
The chart at right indicates the process by
which the accompaniment is played back.
(This does not apply to the rhythm channels.)
The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the
original style data. This source pattern is
recorded using accompaniment style
recording (see below).
As shown in the chart at right, the actual
output of the accompaniment is determined by
various parameter settings and chord changes
(played in Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard) entered to this source pattern.
1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)
2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)
Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard)
Pitch Conversion
3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)
This data is created by
chords played in the
Auto Accompaniment
section of the
keyboard (page 65).
These settings are
edited from the
PARAMETER display.
These parameters
determine how the
pitch of the source
pattern is converted
when you play chords
in the Auto
Accompaniment
section of the
keyboard.
Other Settings
5 High Key (threshold of the pitch
conversion)
6 Note Limit (soundable range)
7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of
the chord change)
Output
Operation
1
Select the desired accompaniment style
for editing. To record a new
accompaniment style from scratch, call
up the BASIC page in the Style Creator
display and select “New Style” by
pressing the [C] button.
3
A
B
C
D
2
E
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4
Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the
operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting
on the next page.
BACK
F
G
NEXT
Use the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons to
select the various
pages.
5
Call up the Style display
by pressing the [I]
(SAVE) button (in
Assembly page: [J]
button), then save the
recorded / edited data
to the USER or FLOPPY
DISK page.
H
I
J
112
PSR-2100/1100
END
Press the [EXIT]
button to close
the STYLE
CREATOR
display.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Realtime Recording — Basic
You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based
on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.
1
Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and
pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.
Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data
of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page”
on page 114) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC
CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.
Calls up the display for changing the
tempo or beat (time signature).
Selects an empty style,
allowing you to create a
new style from scratch.
A
B
C
D
E
Available only when the channel is set to
[RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete
specific percussion sounds during
recording. Simultaneously hold down this
button and press the key corresponding to
the instrument you want to delete.
When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over
channels containing data. To delete data from a specific
channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press
the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the
selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding
to the channel you wish to
cancel. As long as you
continue to hold down the
F
[J] button, you can toggle
G
between deleting and
restoring the selected data.
H
Releasing the [J] button
I
permanently deletes the
data. Before recording to
J
one of the non-rhythm
channels (BASS - PHR 2),
make sure to delete the
existing data of the
appropriate channel.
REC.... Channel is enabled for recording.
ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback.
OFF .... Channel is muted.
2
First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/
STOP] button.
The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern
loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while
listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the
percussion instruments assigned to the keys.
3
Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.
END
With the REC CHANNEL
display shown, close the
display by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
If you’ve enabled Sync Start
(by pressing the SYNC.
START button), you can
start recording by simply
pressing a key on the keyboard.
• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can
be selected for the RHY 2
channel.
• For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), allvoices with the exception
of the Organ Fultes voice/
Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be
selected.
PSR-2100/1100
113
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Other Parameters in the Basic Display
[I] (SAVE) button
Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.
[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons
Determines the section to be recorded.
[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons
Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill
In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure.
[D] (Execute) button
Executes the Pattern Length change.
You can also select the
desired section for recording
by pressing appropriate
panel button. Pressing one
of the Section buttons calls
up the SECTION display,
from which you can change
sections by using the [6▲▼]/
[7▲▼] buttons. To actually
enter the change, press the
[8▲] button.To select the Fill
In section, press the [AUTO
FILL IN] button.
Recording — Precautions
• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord.
All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source
C R C
C R C
chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7),
C
=
chord
note
keep the following points in mind:
C, R = recommended note
* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the
recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get
optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)
* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you
can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,
providing you use them as short passing tones.)
The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the
section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 119.
• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord
progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to
“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that
would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment
pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.
Step Recording
With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to
perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.
F
G
H
I
J
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 108).
• In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating
accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the
selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark
position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.
• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event
data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,
etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).
Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 112) beforehand.
114
PSR-2100/1100
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly
This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —
from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step
4 on page 112.
1
These let you select the accompaniment style that
will be used for each channel of your original
style. Select the desired channel by pressing the
[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same
button to call up the Style screen, from which you
can select the accompaniment style.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
After repeating steps 1 and 2
as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)
button to save the assembled
style data. From here, you can
store the settings of all
channels (RHYTHM 1,
RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a
single accompaniment style.
8
Selects the style section and
channel that will be copied to
the corresponding channels,
selected with the [A]-[D] and
[F]-[I] buttons above.
Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can
assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and
channel that will be copied are playing.
SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM
channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display
(page 114) are played back simultaneously.
ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set
to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 113)
are played back simultaneously.
OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC
CHANNEL display (page 113), OFF does not
appear and is not available.
If you change the section
and channel in steps #1 and
#2, the currently specified
section and channel are also
changed. The channels
being recorded are also
changed and recording is
stopped automatically.
The PLAY TYPE parameter
affects only the playback,
and does not change the
actual accompaniment style
data.
PSR-2100/1100
115
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style
Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics
These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment
style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.
■ Groove
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Executes the Groove operation. After
the operation is completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting you
restore the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Groove results. The
Undo function only has one level; only
the previous operation can be undone.
Calls up the Style display and
lets you store the edited
accompaniment style data.
Determines the settings for each of the
Groove parameters (see the list below).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Groove parameters
116
Original Beat
Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is
applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.
Beat Converter
Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For
example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are
shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12
Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.
Swing
Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.
For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,
6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of
swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.
Fine
Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to
be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine
which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early
or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”
types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.
PSR-2100/1100
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
■ Dynamics
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Executes the Dynamics operation. After the
operation is completed, this button changes
to [UNDO], letting you restore the original
data if you’re not satisfied with the
Dynamics results. The Undo function only
has one level; only the previous operation
can be undone.
1
2
3
Select the desired channel to which
Dynamics is to be applied.
4
5
6
7
Calls up the Style display
and lets you store the
edited accompaniment
style data.
8
Determines the settings for each of the
Dynamics parameters (see the list
below).
Dynamics parameters
Accent Type
Selects the type of accent.
Strength
Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The
higher the value, the stronger the effect.
Expand/Compress
Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity
value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower
than 100% compress it.
Boost/Cut
Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above
100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.
Velocity is determined by
how strongly you play the
keyboard.
The more strongly you play
the keyboard, the higher the
velocity value and, hence,
the louder the sound.
PSR-2100/1100
117
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Editing the Channel Data
In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded
accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.
See the explanations below.
Preset channel BASSPHRASE 2 can not be
edited.
■ Quantize
Refer to page 105.
■ Velocity Change
Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)
buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).
■ Bar Copy
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the
specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the
region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which
the data is to be copied.
■ Bar Clear
This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)
and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared.
■ Remove Event
This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons
to select the desired event type to be removed.
118
PSR-2100/1100
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter
This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style
change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the
parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 112. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 112.
When NTR is set to “Root
Fixed” and NTT is set to
“Bypass,” the “Source
Root” and “Source Chord”
parameters are changed to
“Play Root” and “Play
Chord,” respectively. In this
case, you can change
chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels.
See the explanations below.
■ Source Root/Chord
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default
setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data
is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you
change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also
change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 114.
When the Source Root is C:
C6
CMaj
CM711
CM7
CM79
C9
C69
C
C R C
C R
C R C
C C R
Cm
Caug
R C R
Cm711
C
R C
C7 5
C
C
C
C C C
C
C R C R
C
R C
C
C
C
C C
C1+5
C
C
C7sus4
C
C
R
C
C C
C R C
C
C
C
C
C R
C C
C C
C C R
C
C
R
C
C
C
C = chord note
C, R = recommended
note
R C C
C R C
C
C
C79
Csus2
Csus4
R C
C
C R
C
C
C C
C713
C
C C R
C
R C
C R
R
C C C
C
C7
C
C
C R C
Cm79
C C
C79
C
C R C
C R C
R
C R
C
C R
R C
C R
R
C C C
Cm9
C
C713
C
C R C
C R
Cdim7
C
R C
C1+8
C7aug
CM7aug
C C
C
R C
Cdim
C711
C79
C R C
C
C
C
C C C
Cm75
C
R C C
CmM79
R C
C R C
Cm7
C R
C
C R
C C
C R C
C
C
CmM7
C
C R
C R C
Cm6
C R
C R C
C R C
C R
■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)
• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.
Root Trans (Root Transpose)
When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,
E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that
contain melody lines.
Root Fixed
The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key
of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.
PSR-2100/1100
119
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
• NTT (Note Transposition Table)
This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.
Bypass
No transposition.
Melody
Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Chord
Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano
or guitar-like chordal parts.
Bass
Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.
Melodic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by
a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a
semitone. Other notes are not changed.
Harmonic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in
the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth
intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.
■ High Key/Note Limit
• High Key
This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)
of the note transposition for the chord root
change. Any notes calculated to be higher
than the highest key are transposed down to
the octave just below the highest key. This
setting is effective only when the NTR
parameter (page 119) is set to “Root Trans.”
• Note Limit
This sets the note range (highest and lowest
notes) for voices recorded to the style
channels. By judicious setting of this range,
you can ensure that the voices sound as
realistic as possible — in other words, that no
notes outside the natural range are sounded
(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo
sound). The actual notes that sound are
automatically shifted to the set range.
Example — When the highest key is F
Root changes
CM
CM
Notes played
C3-E3-G3
C 3-F3-G 3
FM
F3-A3-C4
FM
F 2-A 2-C 3
Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4
Root changes
CM
CM
FM
3-C4
E3-G3-C4
F3-G
F3-A3-C4
Notes played
High Limit
Low Limit
■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)
These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord
changes.
Stop
The notes stop sounding.
Pitch Shift
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.
Pitch Shift to Root
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.
Retrigger
The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.
Retrigger To Root
The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note
remains the same.
120
PSR-2100/1100
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
The PSR-2100/1100 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in
the same way as the preset Multi Pads.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
GUITAR
LAYER
STRINGS
LEFT
USER
MENU
DEMO
E
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
MIC.
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BASS
DSP
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
J
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
FREEZE
MEMORY
STOP
MULTI PAD
Operation
1
Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for
editing. To record a new Multi Pad from
scratch, call up the RECORD page in
the Multi Pad Creator display and
select “New Bank” by pressing the [C]
(NEW BANK) button.
3
A
B
C
D
2
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
E
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4
Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for
each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page.
BACK
F
G
H
NEXT
Use the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons
to select the
RECORD or
EDIT page.
5
Call up the Multi Pad
display by pressing the
[I] (SAVE) button, then
save the recorded /
edited data to the USER
or FLOPPY DISK page.
I
J
END
Press the [EXIT]
button to close the
MULTI PAD
display.
PSR-2100/1100
121
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record
The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121.
Select the desired Multi
Pad for recording or editing.
You can also select it by
pressing the MULTI PAD
[1] to [4] button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Select this to engage
the Record standby
mode (synchronized
standby).
Select this to save the
recorded pad data to
USER or FLOPPY DISK
drive.
Selects an empty Multi Pad
bank, allowing you to create a
new Multi Pad from scratch.
Calls up the NAME display to
input the new name.
Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad
on or off (see below).
Start recording
First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start
recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on
for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major
seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).
C R C
C R C
C = chord note
C, R = recommended note
Others: non-recommended note
• Other notes besides those
of the C major seventh
scale can be recorded;
however, this may result in
the recorded phrase not
matching the chord when
being played back.
• The rhythm part of the
currently selected style is
used as a rhythmic guide
(in place of a metronome),
playing back during
recording. However, it is
not recorded to the Multi
Pad.
Stop recording
Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished
playing the phrase.
Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off
■ Repeat
Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the
phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.
■ Chord Match
If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be
automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.
122
PSR-2100/1100
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit
With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform
them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121.
F
F
G
G
H
H
I
I
J
J
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 108).
• Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you
to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat
playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.
• Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed.
PSR-2100/1100
123
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
PART
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
MENU
DEMO
E
RESET
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
XG
SYNTH.
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
MAX
AUTO
FILL IN
CHOIR & PAD
ORGAN FLUTES
SIGNAL
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
ENDING
/ rit.
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BRASS
VARIATION
RESET
MIC.
HELP
RESET
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
BASS
MUSIC
FINDER
TEMPO
MASTER VOLUME
E.PIANO
Mixing Console
This set of controls
lets you adjust the
balance of the
voices and their stereo position, as well
as the amount of
effect that is applied
to each voice.
DSP
UPPER OCTAVE
J
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
MAIN
A
DIGITAL RECORDING
BALLROOM
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
SYNC. START
SWING &
JAZZ
NEXT
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
PART
You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button
(page 64).
Operation
1
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button
repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the
button switches among the displays listed below.
PANEL PART
Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/
Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song,
microphone input (PSR-2100 only)
STYLE PART
Accompaniment parts
SONG CH 1 - 8
Channels 1 - 8 of song playback
SONG CH 9 -16
Channels 9 - 16 of song playback
2
Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.
For information on the various parameters and settings and how
to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 125.
You can quickly and easily
set all parts to the same
value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE
parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds
to the parameter you want
to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA
ENTRY] dial to change the
value.
n
For details on parameters
related to the Sound Creator, see page 91.
END
Close the Mixing
Console display by
pressing the [EXIT]
button.
■ About the parameters
• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 125)
This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto
Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 162) with the rich and dynamic voices
that are exclusive to the PSR-2100/1100. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for
your song playback.
• FILTER (page 126)
These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.
• TUNE (page 126)
These give you various tuning controls.
• EFFECT (page 127)
These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.
• EQ (Equalizer) (PSR-2100 only) (page 130)
Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument, letting you adjust the sound to match the particular
performance space. Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part.
124
PSR-2100/1100
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.
1
Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of
the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special
voices of the PSR-2100/1100. To use the normal
XG voice set, turn this off.
Use these to select the VOICE,
PANPOT, or VOLUME
parameter rows.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
The [RHY2] categories in
the STYLE PART display are
only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit
(percussion) voice.
n
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
The [RHY1] channel in the
STYLE PART display can be
assigned to any voice except
for the Organ Flutes voice.
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
Each press of this
button switches
among the various
parts/channels.
n
Allows you to select
the specific voice to
be replaced.
These let you select
the voice of each
part, and adjust the
panpot and volume.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VOICE
Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 57). When the
Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the
Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.
PANPOT
Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard
left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.
VOLUME
Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts.
2
F
ALL REVOICE
Replaces all of the replaceable
XG voices with the rich and
authentic voices of the PSR2100/1100.
G
When playing GM song data,
channel 10 (in the SONG
CH 9 - 16 page) can only be
used for a Drum Kit voice.
When changing the rhythm/
percussion voices (drum
kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from
the VOICE parameter, the
detailed settings related to
the drum voice are reset,
and in some cases you may
be unable to restore the
original sound. In the case
of song playback, you can
restore the original sound
by returning to the beginning of the song and playing
back from that point. In the
case of accompaniment
style play, you can restore
the original sound by selecting the same style again.
Keep in mind that using the
Revoice function may result
in unnatural or unexpected
sound, depending on the
particular song data.
H
I
J
BASIC REVOICE
Replaces only the recommended
voices that are suitable for playing
back the song.
ALL NO REVOICE
All the voices are returned to the
original XG voices.
1
2
3
Selects the XG voices to
be replaced (voices
usually used when
playing back)
4
5
6
7
8
Executes the settings and closes the Auto
Revoice Setup display.
Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without
executing the settings.
Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices
(when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).
PSR-2100/1100
125
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.
Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.
For details about the Filter,
see page 92.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
n
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
Be careful with these controls. Depending on the
selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or
distortion.
Each press of this
button switches among
the various parts/
channels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect
(see “Harmonic Content” on page 92).
BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by
adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 92).
8
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.
Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO
TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in
pitch from one note to the
next.
Refer to the explanation below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.
MASTER ... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.
SONG........ Transposes the pitch of the song playback.
KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.
PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 61, 91), this determines the Portamento time. The
higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only
applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).
PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is
from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.
OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The
value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button.
TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.
126
PSR-2100/1100
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Adjusting the Effects
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.
1
Indicates the type name for each effect block.
Press this to edit and store
the effect (page 127, 128).
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
A
F
B
G
C
H
There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and
DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). For
details, refer to the Effect
Block list (page 128).
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
D
I
E
J
Each press of
this button
switches among
the various
parts/channels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Switches among the
effect sections:
REVERB, CHORUS,
and DSP.
8
Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information
about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 128.
2
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When the BLOCK
parameter is set to
REVERB, CHORUS, or
DSP1-4/DSP, press this
to call up the display
from which you can
change the detailed
settings for the effects.
These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.
BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).
PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only
when BLOCK is set to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion” — or when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–4” (PSR-2100).
CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This
parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.
TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The
actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.
PSR-2100/1100
127
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
3
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Switches between
the upper/lower
parameters. For the
lower parameter,
the depth can be
changed when the
[VARIATION]
button is on.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Calls up the
display for storing
the effect.
Determines the level of the
effect (return level). This is not
available when BLOCK is set
to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER
is set to “CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion” or
when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–
4” (PSR-2100).
8
Determines the
effect block.
Determines the value of the
selected parameter.
Determines the effect category.
Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.
Determines the effect type.
4
F
Calls up the display
for naming the User
Effect (page 48).
G
Keep in mind that in some
cases noise may result if
you adjust the effect parameters while playing the
instrument.
H
I
J
Select the
destination to
which the effect
is to be stored.
The number of
memory spaces
available for the
destination differs
for each block
(refer to the chart
below).
Stores the effect settings you
made above to a User Effect
location (SYSTEM) for future
recall. To call up the effect, select
USER from the CATEGORY
parameter and select the desired
effect from the TYPE parameter.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effect Block
Block
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP 1 (PSR-2100)
DSP(PSR-1100)
DSP2 - 4 (PSR-2100 only)
128
PSR-2100/1100
Parts
Characteristics
All parts
Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in
a concert hall or jazz club.
Number of User Effect
3
All parts
Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts
are being played simultaneously.
3
Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),
MIC (PSR-2100 only), Style
In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this
section features a variety of special effects,
including distortion.
3
Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),
MIC (automatically assigned)
Any unused DSP blocks are automatically
assigned to the remaining active parts.
10
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Effect Structure
The PSR-2100/1100 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be
set with the panel controls.
About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion
All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect
to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects, and
DSP 2 - DSP 4 (PSR-2100 only) are Insertion effects. The DSP1/DSP effect, on the other hand, can be configured for
either System or Insertion routing.
The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return
controls set on the PSR-2100/1100.
PSR-2100
Unused DSP blocks are automatically
assigned to the active parts.
MAIN VOICE
DSP2
DRY LINE
Dry
REVERB
Rev Send
Reverb Return
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
LAYER VOICE
DSP3
Rev Send
Cho Send
Dry
LEFT VOICE
DSP4
Rev Send
Master EQ
CHORUS
OUT
Chorus Return
Cho Send
Dry
MIC
MIC
Effect
Vocal
Harmony
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
SONG
(each channel)
Dry
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
STYLE
(each channel)
Dry
DSP1
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect
(here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels),
it is put here in the signal flow.
Rev Send
Cho Send
When DSP is set as a System effect,
it is put here in the signal flow.
DSP Send
DSP1
DSP Return
DRY LINE
PSR-1100
Dry
MAIN VOICE
DSP
Rev Send
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect
(here PART is set to MAIN),
it is put here in the signal flow.
Cho Send
REVERB
Reverb Return
DSP Send
Dry
LAYER VOICE
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
LEFT VOICE
OUT
CHORUS
Chorus Return
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
STYLE/SONG
(each channel)
Rev Send
Cho Send
When DSP is set as a System effect,
it is put here in the signal flow.
DSP Send
DSP
DSP Return
PSR-2100/1100
129
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the
room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the
level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space,
or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low range
frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high
frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.The PSR-2100 possesses
a high grade five-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a final effect —tone control— can be added to the
output of your instrument.
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.
1
Call up the MASTER EQ
EDIT display.
Select the
desired Master
EQ type.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Select the EQ type to adjust
the EQ HIGH using the [1▲▼]
- [8▲▼] buttons.
Select the EQ type to adjust
the EQ LOW using the
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons.
2
Select the
desired Master
EQ type.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
Q
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
An edited PRESET or USER
curve can be stored to
USER 1 or 2.
The PRESET and USER curves can be edited
as required via the corresponding LCD buttons
— EQ1 through EQ5.Each of the 5 bands can
be boosted (“+” values) or cut (“–”values) by up
to 12 dB.
Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands
simultaneously.
GAIN
FREQ
130
PSR-2100/1100
Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the
edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be
used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The
higher the “Q,” the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band.
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal
harmony based on a single lead vocal. Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony
types are provided. In addition to straightforward harmony, the PSR-2100 also lets you change the apparent gender of
the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the PSR-2100 automatically
generate a two-part female backup. A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible
control over the vocal harmony sound.
MIC.
VH TYPE
SELECT
VOCAL
HARMONY
MIC.
SETTING
TALK
For details about connecting
a microphone, see
page 155.
EFFECT
OVER
SIGNAL
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
STYLE
POP & ROCK
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
GUITAR
LAYER
PART
STRINGS
LEFT
USER
MENU
DEMO
E
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
MIC.
SYNC.
START
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
XG
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BASS
DSP
ORGAN FLUTES
MUSIC
FINDER
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
UPPER OCTAVE
J
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
FREEZE
DATA ENTRY
OTS
LINK
MEMORY
Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting (page 155).
MIC.
VH TYPE
SELECT
VOCAL
HARMONY
MIC.
SETTING
EFFECT
TALK
OVER
SIGNAL
Determines the on/off setting of the effect
applied to the microphone, set in the
MIXING CONSOLE display (page 127).
This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE
display (page 131) and lets you set the
desired harmony type.
This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the
vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using
a connected microphone. This is especially useful when
you talk between songs during a performance.
This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING
display (page 133) and lets you adjust the
level of the microphone and vocal harmony
effect.
If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can
sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have
vocal harmony parts added automatically.
Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type
1
Press the [VH TYPE
SELECT] button.
Select a Vocal
Harmony type.
2
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
This lets you adjust
the amount of
harmony effect that
is applied.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PSR-2100
131
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
3
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Select a Vocal Harmony type.
Return to the VOCAL HARMONY
TYPE display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select a Vocal Harmony parameter.
END
Save the changed
data (page 38, 47).
Adjust the parameter value.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous
display.
The saved settings can be
named (page 44) or deleted
(page 46) in the USER page.
Vocal Harmony Parameter List
132
Chordal Type/Vocoder Type
Determines how the harmony notes are applied.
Harmony Gender Type
Can be set to “Off” or “Auto”. When “Auto”, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically.
Lead Gender Type
Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be
changed. When “Off” no gender change occurs. When ”Unison”, “Male” or “Female” is selected the
corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number of harmony notes which
can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.)
Lead Gender Depth
Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types (above) is
selected.
Lead Pitch Correction
When “Correct” is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is
only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected.
Auto Upper Gender Threshold
Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones
above the lead vocal pitch.
Auto Lower Gender Threshold
Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones
below the lead vocal pitch.
Upper Gender Depth
Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender
Threshold.
Lower Gender Depth
Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender
Threshold.
Vibrato Depth
Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender
Type is selected.
Vibrato Rate
Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.
Vibrato Delay
Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced.
Harmony1 Volume
Sets the volume of the first harmony note.
Harmony2 Volume
Sets the volume of the second harmony note.
Harmony1 Pan
Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the first harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo position
of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.
Harmony2 Pan
Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the second harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo
position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.
Harmony1 Detune
Detunes the first harmony note by the specified number of cents.
Harmony2 Detune
Detunes the second harmony note by the specified number of cents.
Pitch to Note
When “ON” the lead vocal sound “plays” the PSR-2100 tone generator system. (However, dynamic changes
in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.)
Pitch to Note Part
Determines which of the PSR-2100 parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note
parameter is “ON”.
PSR-2100
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone
— MICROPHONE SETTING
Operation
1
2
Press the [MIC.
SETTING]
button.
Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button and set the parameters.
BACK
NEXT
For information on the various parameters and settings and
how to use them, refer to the explanations
below.
END
Press the [EXIT]
button to return to the
previous display.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects —
OVERALL SETTING
The explanations here apply to step 2 above.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Select the 3BAND EQ.
Select the NOISE GATE/
COMPRESSOR.
Select the VOCAL HARMONY
CONTROL/MIC.
Use these to change the value for each
function or setting. For details, see below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the
room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the
level for each band. The PSR-2100 features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.
Hz .............. Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.
dB ............... Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.
■ NOISE GATE
This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively
cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.
SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off.
TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.
PSR-2100
133
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
■ COMPRESSOR
This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is
useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft
parts louder and loud parts softer.
SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off.
TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be
applied.
RATIO ........ This adjusts the compression ratio.
OUT ........... Adjusts the final output level.
■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL
The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.
VOCODER CONTROL
The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data — the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the
song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony.
• SONG CHANNEL
MUTE/PLAY:
When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song
playback.
OFF:
Song data control over harmony is turned off.
1-16:
When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the note data recorded to the assigned song
channel controls the harmony.
• KEYBOARD
OFF: Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.
UPPER: Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony.
LOWER: Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.
BALANCE
This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value
increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead
Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output.
MODE
All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony
effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the
harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below.
VOCODER:
The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (Main, Layer and Left) and/ or song
data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks.
CHORDAL:
During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the
harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song
does not contain any chord data.)
AUTO:
When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is
automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.
CHORD
The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection.
OFF: Chords are not detected.
XF: Chords of XF format are detected.
1-16: Chords are detected from note data in the specified song channel.
■ MIC (MICROPHONE)
The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.
MUTE .............. When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off.
VOLUME ......... Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.
134
PSR-2100
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects — TALK
SETTING
Determines the settings when the [TALK] button is on.
The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 133.
VOLUME/PAN/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
This determines the amount of
attenuation to be applied to the overall
sound (excepting the microphone input)
— allowing you to effectively adjust the
balance between your voice and the
overall instrument sound.
This determines the volume of
the microphone sound.
1
2
3
4
5
6
This sets the stereo pan position
of the microphone sound.
7
8
These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects
applied to the microphone sound.
DSP/TYPE/DEPTH
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
This sets the depth of the DSP effect
applied to the microphone sound.
1
This turns the DSP effect applied to the
microphone sound ON or OFF.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied
to the microphone sound.
PSR-2100
135
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These
sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-2100/1100 to your own musical needs and preferences.
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
(L)
(R)
(STYLE)
TOP
REC
NEW SONG
METRONOME
REPEAT
START/STOP
REW
BACK
SYNC. START
STYLE
POP & ROCK
BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DANCE
LATIN
USER
PART
MENU
DEMO
VOICE EFFECT
LEFT
HOLD
TOUCH
PIANO & HARPSI.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
LAYER
LEFT
GUITAR
STRINGS
USER
TEMPO
RESET
RESET
MIN
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP
BREAK
MAIN
INTRO
SYNC.
START
XG
ORGAN FLUTES
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY
TALK
EFFECT
SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING
BALANCE
ENTER
DIRECT
ACCESS
EXIT
CHANNEL ON/OFF
SYNC.
STOP
AUTO
FILL IN
WOODWIND
SYNTH.
CHOIR & PAD
RESET
MIC.
FUNCTION
MAX
ENDING
/ rit.
BRASS
VARIATION
PERCUSSION
OVER
STOP
MULTI PAD
FADE
IN/OUT
STANDBY
ON
BASS
DSP
UPPER OCTAVE
HELP
MASTER VOLUME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
MUSIC
FINDER
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
HARMONY/
MONO
ECHO
SUSTAIN
E.PIANO
MAIN
DIGITAL RECORDING
SWING &
JAZZ
MIXING CONSOLE
BALLAD
NEXT
VOICE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
FF
FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION MEMORY
PART
START/STOP
OTS
LINK
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE
MEMORY
Operation
1
MENU
DEMO
2
Select the desired function.
HELP
FUNCTION
3
Set the parameters of the selected
function.
The operations for each function are
covered in the following explanations.
END
To return to the previous display, press the
[EXIT] button.
Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune
■ Master Tune (page 138)
This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the
tuning with that of other instruments.
■ Scale Tune (page 138)
This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing
period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras.
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 140)
These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord
Fingering
■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 141)
These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.
■ Chord Fingering (page 142)
This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can
even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.
136
PSR-2100/1100
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Making Settings for the Pedals and
Keyboard — Controller
■ Pedal (page 142)
These settings determine how the connected foot
pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches)
are used. They can be assigned to a variety of
functions, letting you control operations with your
feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/
off, or triggering Fill In patterns.
■ Keyboard / Panel (page 144)
These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the
keyboard (how touch affects volume), the on/off
status of the Modulation wheel (PSR-2100 only), and
the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song
data, and entire instrument).
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set
■ Registration Sequence (page 145)
This determines the order in which the Registration
Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.
■ Freeze (page 145)
This lets you specify the settings you want to be
maintained or left unchanged, even when changing
Registration Memory presets.
■ Voice Set (page 146)
This lets you determine whether certain voice-related
settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are
automatically called up or not when you select a
voice.
Making MIDI Settings
■ System (page 148)
These determine various system messages settings
(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well
as Local Control on/off.
■ Transmit (page 149)
This determines how playback data is sent to
connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are
assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also
lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over
each channel.
■ Receive (page 150)
This determines how the parts of the PSR-2100/1100
respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e.,
which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive
channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to
be received over each channel.
■ Root (page 150)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root
notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.
■ Chord Detect (page 150)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the
chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.
Other Settings — Utility
■ Config 1 (page 151)
This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,
Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.
■ Config 2 (page 152)
From this page, you can adjust the display, and
change the voice number indication.
■ Disk (page 153)
Setting Harmony and Echo (page 146)
These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect
applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the
amount of effect.
From this page, you can format disks, and copy from
disk to disk.
■ Owner (page 154)
From this page, you can set the language of the
instrument, and input your own name — which is
shown automatically every time the power is turned
on.
■ System Reset (page 154)
This function restores the PSR-2100/1100 to its
original factory settings. You can also specify which
types of settings are to be restored, as well as store
your own original settings for future recall.
PSR-2100/1100
137
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune
Hz (Hertz)
This unit of measurement
refers to the frequency of a
sound, and represents the
number of times a sound
wave vibrates in a second.
n
The Tune function does not
affect the Drum Kit or SFX
Kit voices.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determines the overall
pitch of the PSR-2100/
1100, from 414.8 466.8 Hz. Press the 4
or 5 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to
instantly reset the value
to the factory setting of
440.0 Hz.
8
Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune
Cent
A unit of pitch equal to 1/100
of a semitone (100 cents = 1
semitone).
Select the desired scale template.
n
You can register your original scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY
button. To do this, checkmark “SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY
display (page 87).
A
B
C
D
E
Determines the base
note for each scale.
When the base note is
changed, the pitch of the
keyboard is transposed,
yet maintains the original
pitch relationship
between the notes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Selects which parts should be affected by the
scale setting.
Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲▼]
and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [▲▼].
Parts that are set to OFF remain in Equal
Temperament.
Determines the fine tuning of the selected note in 1cent steps. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the
factory setting.
Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning.
The tuning range is from “-64” through “0” to “+63.” Each increment
equals one cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone).
138
PSR-2100/1100
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Scale
■ Equal Temperament
The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This
is the most commonly used tuning in music today.
■ Pure Major/Pure Minor
These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth).
You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.
■ Pythagorean
This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are
collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and
suitable for some leads.
■ Mean-Tone
This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in
tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger
This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on
the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.
The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when
performing period music on the harpsichord.
■ Arabic
Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.
Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)
The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.
C
C
D
E
E
F
F
G
A
A
B
B
Equal Temperament
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Pure Major
0.0
-29.7
3.9
15.6
-14.1
-2.3
-9.4
2.3
-27.3
-15.6
18.0
-11.7
Pure Minor
0.0
33.6
3.9
15.6
-14.1
-2.3
31.3
2.3
14.1
-15.6
18.0
-11.7
Pythagorean
0.0
14.1
3.9
-6.3
7.8
-2.3
11.7
2.3
15.6
6.3
-3.9
10.2
Mean-Tone
0.0
-24.2
-7.0
10.2
-14.1
3.1
-20.3
-3.1
-27.3
-10.2
7.0
-17.2
Werckmeister
0.0
-10.2
-7.8
-6.3
-10.2
-2.3
-11.7
-3.9
-7.8
-11.7
-3.9
-7.8
Kirnberger
0.0
-10.2
-7.0
-6.3
-14.1
-2.3
-10.2
-3.1
-7.8
-10.2
-3.9
-11.7
Arabic1
0.0
0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
Arabic2
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
PSR-2100/1100
139
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Allows you to play back all songs
from the same folder continuously.
Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Quick Start
On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song
(such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to
the first measure, before the
actual note data. When
Quick Start is set to “ON,”
the PSR-2100/1100 reads
all initial non-note data of the
song at the highest possible
speed, then automatically
slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note.
This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible,
with a minimum pause for
reading of data.
n
1
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK2] button.
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK1] button.
Determines the harmony channel for
Vocoder (PSR-2100 only) (page 134).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines whether the Phrase
Mark Repeat function for the song
is on or off. When this is on, you
can repeatedly play back a
specified phrase (selection of
measures) of the song. The
method for specifying a phrase
mark is the same as that in the
SONG POSITION display
(page 81).
Determines the language of the
displayed lyrics.
When this is set to “AUTO,” the
language defaults to that of the
song data. When not set to
“AUTO,” the language defaults to
Japanese, when the internal
setting (page 154) is
JAPANESE; for all other
languages, this is set to
“INTERNATIONAL.”
When set to “ON,” this
automatically sets the proper
Track 1 and Track 2 channels.
Normally, this should be set to
“ON.”
140
PSR-2100/1100
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
(page 160). The channels
are assigned as follows:
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
n
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —
Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting
and Split Point
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These select the part to which the split point
About Section Set
setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand
When any of the Main A-D
range, or both. Press the desired key for the split
sections is not included in
point while holding down one of these buttons.
the accompaniment style
The pressed key is included in the range for the
data, the nearest section is
Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard
automatically selected. For
(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).
example, when Main D is not
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)
contained in the selected
Allows you to simultaneously set the split
accompaniment style, Main
point for both the left-hand range and the
C will be called up.
Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard.
L (LEFT)
Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.
A (ACMP)
Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard.
Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each
independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these
buttons by themselves to set the split point value.
Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting
different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).
Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).
The PSR-2100/1100 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 68) simply
by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.
This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up
with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change
with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)
Real Time
One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button.
Next Bar
One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.
Stop Accompaniment
When auto accompaniment
is turned on and Synchro
Start is off, you can play
chords in the left-hand
(accompaniment) section of
the keyboard with the style
stopped, and still hear the
accompaniment chords.
You can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop
Accompaniment condition.
When this is set to “OFF,” you can use the Chord Match function (page 122) with the Multi Pads or the
Harmony effect (page 61) without having to playback a style.
About Split Point
Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto
Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the
right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than
the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than
the LEFT split point.
Split point (A)
Auto
Accompaniment
section
Split point (L)
Right-hand
Left-hand
section
section
Split point (A) + (L)
Auto Accompaniment section
+ Left-hand section
Right-hand
section
PSR-2100/1100
141
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering
This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn
how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).
Indicates the note that
belongs to a chord. Some
notes can be omitted. The
chord name is indicated
next to “CHORD NAME.”
...Required
...Can be omitted
...Either note can be
omitted
...Can be omitted when
the note indicated by
is omitted
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
This lets you change the
chord type.
Determines the fingering
type (page 65).
Indicates the note that belongs to a
chord in the music.
The chord indication in the
display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if
another method is actually
selected.
Chord Tutor
The Chord Tutor feature is
essentially an electronic
“chord book” that shows you
appropriate fingerings for
chords; it is useful when you
want to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired
chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]
buttons, and the fingerings
for the Fingered method are
indicated in the display.
This lets you change the root
note from the chord.
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Making Settings for the Pedals
Determines the particular
pedal to which a function is
to be assigned.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
Determines the function to be assigned to the
selected pedal. Any one of the available functions
can be assigned to each pedal.
For information on the assignable functions, see
“Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page.
142
PSR-2100/1100
3
4
5
6
7
8
If necessary, you can turn
the corresponding part ON/
OFF or set the control depth
(see the next page).
Pedal on/off operation may
differ depending on the
particular pedal you’ve
connected to the [FOOT
PEDAL 1/2] jack. For
example, pressing down on
one pedal may turn the
selected function on, while
pressing a different make/
brand of pedal may turn the
function off. If necessary,
use this setting to reverse
the operation.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Pedal-controllable Functions
VOLUME*
Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume.
SUSTAIN
When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any
sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO
If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when
pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.
SOFT
Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to
certain voices — PIANO, for example.
GLIDE
When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.
PORTAMENTO
The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is
produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The
portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 126).
PITCHBEND*
Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel.
MODULATION*
Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed
(FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the MODULATION wheel.
DSP VARIATION
Same as the [VARIATION] button.
HARMONY/ECHO
Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.
VOCAL HARMONY (PSR-2100 only) Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button
TALK (PSR-2100 only)
Same as the [TALK] button.
SCORE PAGE+ (PSR-2100 only)
While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).
SCORE PAGE- (PSR-2100 only)
While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).
SONG START/STOP
Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.
STYLE START/STOP
Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
TAP TEMPO
Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
SYNCHRO START
Same as the [SYNC. START] button.
SYNCHRO STOP
Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.
INTRO
Same as the [INTRO] button.
MAIN A
Same as the [MAIN A] button.
MAIN B
Same as the [MAIN B] button.
MAIN C
Same as the [MAIN C] button.
MAIN D
Same as the [MAIN D] button.
FILL DOWN
A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.
FILL SELF
Fill-in starts playing.
FILL BREAK
Break starts playing.
FILL UP
A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.
ENDING
Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.
FADE IN/OUT
Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
FING/ON BASS
The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 65).
BASS HOLD
While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the
fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.
PERCUSSION
The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to
select the desired percussion instrument.
MAIN ON/OFF
Same as the [MAIN] button.
LAYER ON/OFF
Same as the [LAYER] button.
LEFT ON/OFF
Same as the [LEFT] button.
OTS+
Calls up the next One Touch Setting.
OTS-
Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if
SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.
SONG, STYLE, M.PAD, MIC
(PSR-2100 only), LEFT,
LAYER, MAIN
These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.
HALF PEDAL POINT*
You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set
for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only).
UP/DOWN
When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE
When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
ON SPEED
When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.
OFF SPEED
When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.
KIT
When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular
drum kit used for the pedal.
PERCUSSION
When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This
determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
PSR-2100/1100
143
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel
Keyboard Touch/Modulation Wheel
The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to
customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. You can also set whether the
Modulation wheel is effective or not — for each individual keyboard part.
Selects the desired
parameter: Keyboard
Touch, Modulation
Wheel (PSR-2100) or
Transpose Assign.
HARD 2
Requires strong playing to produce
high volume. Best for players with a
heavy touch.
HARD 1
Requires moderately strong playing for
higher volume.
A
B
C
NORMAL Standard touch response.
D
SOFT 1
Produces high volume with moderate
playing strength.
SOFT 2
Produces relatively high volume even
with light playing strength. Best for
players with a light touch.
E
Determines the
Touch sensitivity
setting (Keyboard
Touch only; refer to
the table at right).
Determines the
fixed volume level
when touch is set
to “off” (Keyboard
Touch only).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep
in mind that you can set each voice to a different
touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to
play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can
set this so that the voice is not affected by touch
(page 91).
Determines whether Touch and Modulation Wheel controls are on or not for the corresponding parts.
Transpose Assign
This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.
Transpose
Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,
accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.
1
Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
TRANSPOSE
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SONG
For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of
the songs.
MASTER
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
entire instrument (keyboard voices,
accompaniment styles, and songs).
The transpose function
does not affect the Drum
Kit or SFX Kit voices.
PSR-2100/1100
A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE
ASSIGN, appears.
3
Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
8
KEYBOARD
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and
the accompaniment styles.
144
2
END
Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song
These settings can be used to match both the song and your
keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say
you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.
The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D,
and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To
match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set
the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.”
This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data
down to your comfortable singing key.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —
Registration Sequence
You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the
appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up
the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.
Indicates the file name of the selected
Registration Memory bank.
Determines which pedal is used to advance
(increment) through the sequence.
Determines which
pedal is used to
reverse (decrement)
through the sequence.
Determines how Registration
Sequence behaves when
reaching the end of the
sequence.
Stop
Pressing the [NEXT] button or
the “advance” pedal has no
effect. The sequence is
“stopped.”
Top
The sequence starts again at
the beginning.
Next Bank
The sequence automatically
moves to the beginning of the
next Registration Memory bank
in the same folder.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turns the Registration
Sequence function
on/off. When this is
set to “ON,” the
programmed
Registration
Sequence is shown at
the top right of the
Main display, and you
can step through the
sequence in this
display by using the
[BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons or the pedals.
Deletes the number at the
cursor position.
Inserts the number of the currently
selected Registration Memory preset
immediately before the cursor position.
Replaces the number at the cursor position with the
currently selected Registration Memory number.
END
8
n
Deletes all Registration
Memory numbers in the
sequence.
Indicates the Registration Memory preset
numbers, in the order of the current
Registration Sequence.
These move the cursor position in the sequence.
7
Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.
When you are using the pedal
to call up specified presets, you
can easily reset the Registration Sequence and go back to
the first entry by holding down
the pedal for a few seconds
(the red box indicator at the top
right of the MAIN display goes
out). Press and release the foot
pedal to re-select the first entry
in the sequence.
Setting Registration Sequence
Enable to “ON” overrides any
other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
here). These include the pedal
settings on page 142, and in
Voice Set on page 146.
n
When both “Regist (+) Pedal”
and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set
to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be
used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the
[BACK]/[NEXT] buttons can
be used in the MAIN display.
n
When both “Regist (+) Pedal”
and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set
to the same pedal, “Regist
(+) Pedal” takes priority.
Registration Sequence data
is included as part of the
Registration Memory bank
file. To save your newly programmed Registration
Sequence, store the current
Registration Memory bank
file (page 38, 47). Any Registration Sequence data is lost
when changing Registration
Memory banks, unless
you’ve stored it with the Registration Memory bank file.
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze
This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration
Memory presets. For details, see page 89.
PSR-2100/1100
145
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set
When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound
Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For
example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the
LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page.
Normally, these should all be
set to “ON.”
A
Use these to select the
desired part.
B
C
Harmony/echo cannot be set
for the Layer and Left parts.
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings
(Voice selection, Effects, EQ (PSR-2100 only) and Harmony/echo
assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice.
These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part.
Setting Harmony and Echo
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Determines the Harmony type.
For details, see page 147.
1
2
3
4
5
Determines the level of the Harmony effect.
Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill
effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,
Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.
146
PSR-2100/1100
6
7
8
Determines the lowest velocity value at
which the harmony note will sound. This
allows you to selectively apply the harmony
by your playing strength, letting you create
harmony accents in the melody. The
harmony effect is applied when you play
the key strongly (above the set value).
When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony
effect is applied only to the note that
belongs to a chord played in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
This parameter is not available when Multi
Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in
Type above.
This lets you assign the Harmony
effect to various parts. For details,
see page 147.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
About the Harmony Types
When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected
Split point
Chords played to the left of the
split point control the harmony.
Harmony notes (based on the chord
and the selected type) are automatically
added to the melody played to the right
of the split point.
When “Multi Assign” is selected
Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to
separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the
second by the Layer voice.
When “Echo” is selected
An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Tremolo” is selected
A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Trill” is selected
Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.
About the Harmony Assignments
AUTO
Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts.
Multi
This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the
Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be
played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.
Main
Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
Layer
Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
PSR-2100/1100
147
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the MIDI Parameters
In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the
USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 158).
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
1
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
3
Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)
Select the desired template.
2
3
4
Call up the User display
and press this button to
save the newly edited
MIDI settings.
Up to ten setups can
be saved.
5
2
6
7
All Parts
Transmit all parts including Main, Layer
and Left.
Master KBD
The PSR-2100/1100 functions as a
master keyboard for controlling external
tone generators or other devices.
KBD & Style
Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play
instead of the individual parts (Main/
Layer/Left).
Song
All Transmit channels are set to
correspond to the Song channels 1-16.
Use this to play the PSR-2100/1100
song data with an external tone
generator, or to record your entire
performance to an external sequencer.
Clock Ext.
MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and
PSR-2100/1100 synchronizes with a
external MIDI device.
MIDI Accord 1
An ideal setup for controlling the
keyboard voice and accompaniment
style with a MIDI accordion.
MIDI Accord 2
Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI
accordion control the accompaniment
style, as well as play the chord and bass
parts.
MIDI Pedal 1
The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal controls the bass note of the
accompaniment.
MIDI Pedal 2
The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal plays the bass part.
MIDI OFF
MIDI signals are neither sent nor
received.
8
Call up the Edit display, then
select and set the desired
functions/parameters.
For details about each of the
MIDI edit displays, see the
following pages.
The saved settings can be named (page 44)
or deleted (page 46) in the User page.
END
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System
Call up the display as described in step 2 above.
For editing the Local Control parameters.
For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,
Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop
parameters.
For editing the Message Switch
parameters.
Local Control
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-2100/1100
controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If
you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-2100/1100’s tone
generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows
you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-2100/1100’s internal voices, and use the PSR-2100/1100
keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.
148
PSR-2100/1100
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop
■ Clock
Determines whether the PSR-2100/1100 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from
an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-2100/1100 is being used alone. If you are
using the PSR-2100/1100 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR2100/1100 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the
external device must be connected to the PSR-2100/1100 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an
appropriate MIDI clock signal.
■ Transmit Clock
Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is
transmitted.
■ Receive Transpose
When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 is not transposed, and when it is set
to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-2100/1100 keyboard transpose
(page 144) setting.
■ Start/Stop
Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or
style playback.
FA, FC
MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA”
message corresponds to start,
and “FC” corresponds to stop.
Message Switch
SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF.
SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment
ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and
type) ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external
equipment ON or OFF.
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit
This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.
A
Determines the
channel for changing
transmit settings.
B
C
D
E
Determines the Part for the
selected channel.
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1-16) flash briefly
whenever any data is
transmitted on the channel(s).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turns transmission of the
specified data type on or off.
See below for details on the
data types.
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display
Note
Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which
corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.
Control Change (CC)
Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.
Program Change (PC)
Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.
Pitch Bend (PB)
See page 143.
After Touch (AT)*
With this function, the PSR-2100/1100 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that
pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater
expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 150).
PSR-2100/1100
149
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive
This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port 1 of the USB terminal correspond to channels 1
- 16. Port 2 of the USB terminal corresponds to channels
17 - 32.
A
Determines the channel for
changing receive settings.
B
C
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1 - 32) flash briefly
whenever any data is received
on the channel(s).
D
E
Determines the Part for the
selected channel. See below for
details about the receive parts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turns reception of the specified
data type on or off. See page 149
for details on the data types.
MIDI Receive Parts
OFF
No MIDI data is received.
SONG
Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16
correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.
MAIN
The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LAYER
The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LEFT
The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
KEYBOARD
MIDI note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.
ACMP RHYTHM1-2
The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2.
ACMP BASS
The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS.
ACMP CHORD1-2
The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2.
ACMP PAD
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD.
ACMP PHRASE1-2
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.
EXTRA PART1-5
There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument
itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.
Setting Root Note Channels — Root
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment
section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port 1 of the USB terminal correspond to channels 1
- 16. Port 2 of the USB terminal corresponds to channels
17 - 32.
A
Selects the channels in groups of
eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25
- 32, respectively.
B
C
D
E
When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,”
the root note is detected
from merged MIDI data
received over the channels.
Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Sets all channels to OFF.
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the
accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected
regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that
of the ROOT display above.
150
PSR-2100/1100
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Other Settings — Utility
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and
Tap — CONFIG 1
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time
These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.
Determines the time it takes for the
volume to fade in, or go from minimum to
maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Determines the time the volume is held
at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the time it takes for the
volume to fade out, or go from maximum
to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Metronome
These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the level of the
metronome sound.
Determines which sound is used for the metronome.
Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.
Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.
Determines the time
signature of the metronome
sound.
When you start the song or
accompaniment style, the
values matching to them are
automatically set.
PSR-2100/1100
151
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Parameter Lock
This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls
— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.
PSR-2100 only
Selects the desired
parameter for locking/
unlocking.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines whether the selected
parameter is locked (checkmarked)
or unlocked (empty).
Tap Count
This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 54).
Determines the particular sound
used for the Tap Start function.
Any drum or percussion sound
in the Standard Kit (page 58)
can be selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the level of the tap
sound.
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication
— CONFIG 2
Determines the brightness of
the backlit display.
1
152
PSR-2100/1100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines whether or not the voice bank
and number are shown in the PRESET
page of the VOICE display (page 57).
This is useful when you want to check the
proper bank select MSB/LSB values and
program number to specify when
selecting the voice from an external MIDI
device.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk
This function copies all the data
from one disk to another, letting you
back up all your important data
before editing. For instructions, see
“Copying from Disk to Disk” below.
F
G
H
I
This function formats a
floppy disk (see below).
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off.
When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-2100/1100
automatically calls up the first disk song when
a disk is inserted.
Copying from Disk to Disk
As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-2100/1100,
then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.
1
3
Press the [F] button. A message
appears, prompting you to insert
the source disk.
At the “Please insert a destination
disk and press the OK button ”
prompt, eject the source disk and
replace it with a blank, formatted
disk, then press “OK.” To abort the
operation, press “CANCEL.”
2
4
• Copying cannot be done
between a 2DD disk and
2HD disk. When copying,
make sure both disk are
the same type.
• Depending on the amount
of data contained in the
original source disk, you
may have to swap the two
disks several times until all
of the data is properly
copied.
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 7.
Internal memory
Copy
Insert the disk containing the
original data into the drive and
press “OK.”
A “Now copying” message
appears, and the PSR-2100/
1100 begins copying data to
internal memory. To abort the
operation, press “CANCEL.”
When the operation is finished
(or when prompted), eject the
destination disk.
Formatting a Disk
When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly
format it on the PSR-2100/1100. This includes blank disks as well as disks
already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the
disk.
Disk Lamp
When the power is turned
on, the disk lamp (at the
bottom left of the drive)
lights to indicate the drive
can be used.
Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To
start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the
DISK page above.
Source
disk
Copy
Destination
disk
Commercially available
music data is subject to
protection by copyright
laws. Copying commercially available data is
strictly prohibited,
except for your own personal use. Some music
software is purposely
copy-protected and
cannot be copied.
The Format operation initializes a disk
with a specific file system, allowing the
corresponding device (in this case, the
PSR-2100/1100) to access it properly.
Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should
know which ones to use with the PSR2100/1100. 2DD disks are formatted to
a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks
are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.
CAUTION
Formatting a disk completely erases
all data on the disk. Make sure that
the disk you’re formatting does not
contain important data!
PSR-2100/1100
153
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner
F
Selecting a different language here may
cause the following problems.
• Some characters of the file names you
entered may be garbled.
• Files may not be accessible.
Restoring the original language solves the
above problems.
Reading the files on the computer with a different language system may cause similar
problems to those above.
G
Press this button to
enter an Owner name
(page 17; for
instructions on naming
see page 48). This
name is automatically
shown when you turn
the power on.
Determines the language
used for the display
messages. Once you
change this setting, all
messages will be shown in
the selected language.
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100
— System Reset
This operation lets you restore the PSR-2100/1100 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup,
MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.
Restores the System Setup parameters to the
original factory settings. You can also restore
only the System Setup settings by
simultaneously holding down the highest key
on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power.
Restores the MIDI
templates to the original
factory settings.
Restores the User Effects
(page 128) to the original
factory settings.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Restores the Music Finder
data to the original factory
settings.
Deletes all files and folders
stored in the User page.
1
2
Executes the Factory Reset operation
for all items checkmarked above.
154
PSR-2100/1100
3
4
5
6
7
8
These call up the corresponding Open/
Save displays. These let you store the
corresponding data as files to disk, for
future recall. Pressing each of these
buttons calls up the corresponding
Open/Save display, from which you can
select the corresponding PRESET
page. From this PRESET page, you
can save the relevant data.
The functions and settings
below do not apply to the
Factory Reset operation.
However, you can restore
these to their original settings by calling up the preset
System Setup files, using
the Open/Save System Files
function.
Language
Owner Name
LCD Brightness
All Music Finder records can
be stored together as a single file. When calling up a
stored file, a message
appears prompting you to
replace or append the
records as desired.
Replace:
All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are
deleted and replaced with
the records of the selected
file.
Append:
The records called up are
added to the vacant record
numbers.
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the
power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum
(0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
1
Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack
(standard 1/4" phone jack).
Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.
2
Set the [MIC. LINE] switch (located next to the MIC./
LINE IN jack) to the MIC. position.
MIC. LINE
MIC. LINE
When connecting a microphone
When connecting a guitar
1
1 Using the Headphones
(PHONES jack).
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in
here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal
stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a
pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack
(page 152).
2 Connecting the Microphone
or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)
(PSR-2100 only).
By connecting a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can
enjoy singing along with your own performance or song
playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The
PSR-2100 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through
the built-in speakers.
You should set the [MIC. LINE] switch to the LINE position when
connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC./LINE
IN jack.
3
Use the [INPUT VOLUME]
knob (located next to the
MIC./LINE IN jack) to set the
microphone volume then
trying singing into the
microphone.
The volume should be set high enough that the
SIGNAL lamp on the top panel lights steadily when
you sing, but not so high that the OVER lamp lights
(page 131).
P.155
P.156
2
3
INPUT
VOLUME
MIC. LINE
MIC./
LINE IN
R
L
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
OUTPUT
DC IN 16V
(LEVEL FIXED)
P.157
6
P.156
5
IN
USB
MIDI
OUT
P.156
4
2
FOOT PEDAL
PSR-2100/1100
155
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
3 Playing the sounds of the
PSR-2100/1100 through an
external audio system, and
recording the sounds to an
external recorder (AUX OUT/
OUTPUT jacks)
4 Using the Pedal (footswitch)
or Foot Controller (FOOT
PEDAL 1/2 jack)
You can connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a wide range of
audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT
jacks.
Connect as shown in the illustrations below using
standard audio cables.
By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the
FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one
of a variety of important functions with your foot — such
as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play
(page 142).
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.
By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of
the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of
some panel buttons, doing things like starting and
stopping accompaniment.
The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be
changed (page 142).
CAUTION
CAUTION
When the PSR-2100/1100 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are
connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to
the PSR-2100/1100, then to the external audio system. Reverse
this order when you turn the power off.
Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power
is turned off.
5 Connecting external MIDI
devices (MIDI terminals)
To powered speaker
Audio cable
RCA pin
plug
Phone plug
(standard)
RCA pin plug
AUX IN
R
L
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
OUTPUT
(LEVEL FIXED)
Cassette tape recorder
stereo system
When these are connected
(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL
FIXED), the sound is output to
the external device at a fixed
level, regardless of the
[MASTER VOLUME] control
setting.
When these are connected
(with standard phone
plugs), you can use the
[MASTER VOLUME]
control to adjust the volume
of the sound output to the
external device.
• If you connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a monaural device, use
only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack.
156
PSR-2100/1100
Use the built-in MIDI terminals and standard MIDI cables
to connect external MIDI devices. For more information
about MIDI connections, see “What You Can Do With
MIDI” on page 160.
The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB
terminal is connected to a computer and active.
MIDI IN ...........Receives MIDI messages from an
external MIDI device
MIDI OUT........Sends out MIDI messages generated by
the PSR-2100/1100
For a general overview of MIDI and how you can
effectively use it, refer to the following sections:
• What’s MIDI? (page 158)
• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 160)
• MIDI functions (page 148)
• Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
6 Connecting to a Computer
(USB terminal, MIDI terminal)
Connecting your PSR-2100/1100 to a computer allows
you to transfer data back and forth between the two and
take advantage of the powerful and versatile music
software available. You can connect the devices in one of
two ways:
■ Using the USB terminal
■ Using the MIDI terminals
The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB
terminal is in use.
An appropriate MIDI application for your computer
platform is required.
For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer
and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant
owner’s manuals.
Using the USB terminal
Connect the USB terminal of a computer to the USB
terminal of the PSR-2100/1100 using a USB cable. Make
sure to use a standard USB cable with the USB logo.
USB cable
NEC MultiSync
PC-9821 AS
NEC
About the USB driver
You must install the specified USB driver (YAMAHA
USB MIDI Driver) to your computer before you can
transfer data between the computer and the PSR2100/1100.
You can download a copy of the YAMAHA USB MIDI
Driver free of charge from the XG Library on the
Yamaha Web site (http://www.yamaha-xg.com/).
CAUTION
If you are using a USB cable to connect the PSR-2100/1100 to
your computer, you must connect the USB cable before turning on
the power of the instrument.
Also, do not turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off while any
application software that uses USB or MIDI is running.
If you turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on or off or connect/
disconnect the USB cable in the following states, problems will
occur in the computer system, possibly causing it to “freeze” (hang
up), or causing the PSR-2100/1100 to stop functioning.
• While installing the driver.
• While starting or shutting down the operating system.
• While the computer is in an energy-save or sleep mode.
• When a MIDI application program is starting.
Make sure NOT to perform any of the following operations. Otherwise, the computer may lock up or the PSR-2100/1100 functions
may be disabled.
• Turning the power on/off, or connecting/disconnecting the cable
too often.
• Shifting to energy-save or sleep mode while MIDI data is being
transferred, or returning from sleep mode.
• Disconnecting/connecting the cable while the PSR-2100/1100 is
on.
• Turning the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off, starting up your
computer, or installing the driver while a large amount of data is
being transferred.
• The PSR-2100/1100 will begin transmission a short time after
the USB connection is made.
• When using a USB cable to connect PSR-2100/1100 to your
computer, make the connection directly without passing through
a USB hub.
• Depending on the state of your computer, the operating state of
PSR-2100/1100 may become unstable. Do not use your computer in a way that causes it to enter an unstable state.
Using the MIDI terminals
When using a MIDI interface device installed in the
personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the
personal computer and the PSR-2100/1100 with standard
MIDI cables.
When connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to a personal computer, first
turn off the power to both the PSR-2100/1100 and the computer
before connecting any cables.
After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the
power of the computer first, then that of the PSR-2100/1100.
• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,
connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal
computer to the MIDI IN terminal.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
NEC MultiSync
PC-9821 AS
NEC
PSR-2100/1100
157
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series
computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the
computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI
interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the
MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR2100/1100, as shown in the diagram below.
MIDI IN
Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a
recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,
a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound
(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called
audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.
Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic
instrument (audio data)
RS422
Recording
MIDI OUT
Playback
MINI DIN
8-pin
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the
MIDI interface clock setting in the application
software to match the setting of the MIDI interface
you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the particular software you are using.
What’s MIDI?
Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as
representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you
strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string
and the note sounds.
But how does a digital instrument go about playing a
note?
Acoustic guitar note
production
In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the
pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as
audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play
back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the
actual piano performance. The piano itself is not
necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds
of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.
Recording and playing back the performance of a digital
instrument (MIDI data)
Recording
Playback
Digital instrument note
production
Tone generator
Internal amp
L
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Sequencer
Internal amp
R
Controller (keyboard, etc.)
FD
Playing
the keyboard
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Based on playing information
from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the
tone generator is played
through the speakers.
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic
instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)
stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard,
and output through the speakers.
158
PSR-2100/1100
FD
In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent
through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration
above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic
example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard
is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In
order to record the audio performance on an acoustic
piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,
since the PSR-2100/1100 features a built-in sequencer
that lets you record performance data, this recording
equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument
— the PSR-2100/1100 — allows you to both record and
play back the data.
■ Example Keyboard Data
Voice number (with what voice)
01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key)
60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed)
and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically
(quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong)
120 (strong)
Panel operations on the PSR-2100/1100, such as playing
the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and
stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and
songs also consist of MIDI data.
Tone generator
Sequencer
Keyboard performance
(MIDI data)
However, we also need a sound source to produce the
audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The
tone generator of the PSR-2100/1100 fills this function.
The recorded performance is reproduced by the
sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone
generator capable of accurately producing various
instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at
in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone
generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano —
one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle
playback data and the actual sounds independently, we
can hear our piano performance played by another
instrument, such as guitar or violin.
Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-2100/1100
can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a
controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.
Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets
recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the
sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
using the grand piano sound on the PSR-2100/1100
keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a
resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out
information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”
“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it
pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of
information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the
tone generator plays the stored sampled note.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument
Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other, by sending
and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program
Change and various other types of MIDI data, or
messages.
The PSR-2100/1100 can control a MIDI device by
transmitting note related data and various types of
controller data.The PSR-2100/1100 can be controlled by
incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine
the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices
and effects, change parameter values and of course play
the voices specified for the various parts.
MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:
• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI
songs to floppy disk.
• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of
changing voices and transforming the data.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel
messages and System messages.
■ Channel Messages
The PSR-2100/1100 is an electronic instrument that can
handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the USB
terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16
instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit
information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for
each of the 16 channels.
Message Name
PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF
Messages which are generated when the
keyboard is played. Each message includes
a specific note number which corresponds
to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity
value based on how hard the key is played.
Program Change
Voice selecting (control change bank select
MSB/LSB setting)
Control Change
Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.
The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI
data.
PSR-2100/1100
159
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
MIDI channels
MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen
MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the
performance data for sixteen different instrument parts
can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV
station transmits its broadcasts over a specific
channel.Your home TV set receives many different
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and
you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired
program.
As you can see, it is essential to determine which data
is to be sent over which MIDI channel when
transmitting MIDI data (page 149). The PSR-2100/1100
also allows you to determine how the received data is
played back. (page 150).
■ System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI
system. System messages include messages like Exclusive
Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument
manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the
MIDI device.
Message Name
PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel
Setting
System Exclusive
Message
Effect type settings (Mixing Console),
etc.
Realtime Messages
Clock setting, Start/stop operation
Weather Report
News
1
2
News
2
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The
transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific
MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single
MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving
instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)
matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument
will sound according to the data sent by the
transmitting instrument.
MIDI
cable
MIDI transmit channel 2
MIDI receive channel 2
The PSR-2100/1100’s keyboard and internal tone generator are
also connected by MIDI (page 148).
For example, several tracks (channels) can be
transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as
shown below).
Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-2100/
1100 to an external sequencer
The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-2100/1100
are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI
Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.
What You Can Do With MIDI
The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR2100/1100:
• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various
applications) (page 148)
• Transmit (page 149)
• Receive (page 150)
• Local Control (page 148)
• Clock (page 149)
■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the
PSR-2100/1100 Auto Accompaniment features on a
external sequencer (such as a personal computer).
After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then
play it again on the PSR-2100/1100 (playback).
PSR-2100/1100
MIDI receive
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
NEC MultiSync
PC-9821 AS
NEC
MIDI transmit
MIDI cable or
serial cable
PSR-2100/1100 track (channnel)
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
External sequencer
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
When you want to use the PSR-2100/1100 as an XGcompatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive
part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI
Receive (page 150).
■ Play and control the PSR-2100/1100 from a separate
keyboard
PSR-2100/1100
MIDI receive
MIDI IN
160
PSR-2100/1100
Personal cumputer,
QY series etc.
MIDI OUT
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
MIDI Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data
compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can
playback the data recorded by PSR-2100/1100, and
whether or not the PSR-2100/1100 can playback
commercially available song data or song data created for
other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the
MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to
play back the data without any problem, or you may have
to perform some special operations before the data can be
played back. If you run into problems playing back data,
please refer to the information below.
Disk format
Sequence Format
The system which records song data is called “sequence
format.”
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of
the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-2100/
1100 is compatible with the following formats.
■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are
compatible with Format 0, and most commercially
available software is recorded as Format 0.
• The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with both Format 0
and Format 1.
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used
with various devices, including computers. Different
devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it
is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system
of the device being used.This operation is called
“formatting.”
• Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 is
automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double
sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,
high density), and each type has different formatting
systems.
■ ESEQ
• PSR-2100/1100 can record and playback with both
types of floppy disks.
• When formatted by the PSR-2100/1100, a 2DD disk
stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores
up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and
“1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are
also used to indicate the format type of disk.)
• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be
used is compatible with the format of the disk.
• Song data loaded to the PSR-2100/1100 is
automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the
original format.
This sequence format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-2100/1100
series instruments.This is a common format used with
various Yamaha software.
■ XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI
File) format with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future.
• The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of displaying lyrics
when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
■ Style File
The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file
format which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types.
PSR-2100/1100
161
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices
Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers,
called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice
allocation format.”
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice
allocation format of the song data matches that of the
compatible MIDI device used for playback.
The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with the following
formats.
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,
the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the
specifications of the devices and particular data recording
methods.
■ GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System
Level1, as is most commercially available software.
■ XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1
format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to
provide more voices and variations, as well as greater
expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure
compatibility of data well into the future.
• Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 using
voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.
■ DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series
instruments. This is also a common format used with
various Yamaha software.
162
PSR-2100/1100
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
• The PSR-2100/1100 does not turn on; there
is no power.
Make sure that the PSR-2100/1100 has been plugged in properly (page 16).
• A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.
• Noise is heard from the PSR-2100/1100’s
speakers.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-2100/1100 may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from
the PSR-2100/1100.
• The display is too bright or too dark to read.
The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;
try adjusting the contrast (page 17).
• The keyboard volume is low compared to that
of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.
The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard
part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower
the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 64).
• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or
song playback is low compared to that of the
keyboard.
The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set
too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display
(page 125).
• The overall volume is low, or no sound is
heard.
• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the
[MASTER VOLUME] dial.
• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of
MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 64).
• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 64, 81).
• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the
headphones.
• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 148).
• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.
You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-2100/1100. When
this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest
played notes sound. See page 165 for information on the maximum polyphony.
• Accompaniment style or Song playback does
not start.
• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
(page 149).
• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an
accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 64); to
playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 79).
• “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an
appropriate song in the SONG display (page 79).
• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the
beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 81).
• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when
one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.
MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
(page 149).
• Only the rhythm channel plays.
Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP]
button.
• The accompaniment style does not start,
even when Synchro Start is in standby
condition and a key is pressed.
You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand
range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)
range of the keyboard.
• The desired chord is not recognized or output
by the auto accompaniment.
• You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord
Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 66).
• You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not
the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the
keys according to the selected mode (page 65).
• An unexpected result or malfunction occurred
during an operation.
If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more
buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or
unusual results may occur.
• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized
regardless of the split point or where chords
are played on the keyboard.
This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”
If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the
keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different
fingering mode (page 65).
PSR-2100/1100
163
Troubleshooting
Problem
164
Possible Cause and Solution
• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.
The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”
changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as
the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 138).
• Some channels do not properly play back
when playing back song data.
Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 81).
•
The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as
possible is picked up by your vocal microphone:
• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.
• Use a directional microphone.
• Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part.
• Separate the microphone from the instrument's speakers as much as possible.
• Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING
display (page 133).
• Increase the microphone input level (“TH.”) in the Compressor function from
the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 133).
If you experience distorted or out-of-tune
sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your
vocal microphone may be picking up
extraneous sounds (other than your voice) —
the Auto Accompaniment sound from the
PSR-2100/1100, for example. In particular,
bass sounds can cause mistracking of the
Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100 only).
• Appropriate harmony notes are not produced
by the Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100
only).
Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes
for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 134.
• The Harmony function does not operate.
Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering
modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 65).
• The microphone input signal and Vocal
Harmony sound (PSR-2100 only) cannot be
recorded.
This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.
• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via
the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables
are connected properly.
Remove the USB cable from the PSR-2100/1100’s USB terminal.
• When a voice is changed, the previously
selected effect is changed.
Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled
when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 146).
• There is a slight difference in sound quality
between notes played on the keyboard.
• Some voices have a looping sound.
• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher
pitches, depending upon the voice.
This is normal and is a result of the PSR-2100/1100’s sampling system.
• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch
when played in the upper or lower registers.
This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this
type of pitch shift.
• Even though a Registration Memory setting
containing a User voice is selected, the Open/
Save display shows a Preset voice.
This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is
the selected User voice.
When a User voice is registered to the User drive or floppy disk, the actual
registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the parameter settings as set in
the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a
User voice, the PSR-2100/1100 selects the Preset voice (on which the User
voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it – so that your
original User voice is sounded.
• Disk save operations take a long time.
This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1
megabyte of data to a floppy disk.
• The voice produces excessive noise.
Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or
Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 126).
• The sound is distorted or noisy.
• The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings
are appropriate.
• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,
especially distortion-type effects (page 127).
• Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 92)
can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.
• Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display
(Mixing Console — page 130)? (PSR-2100 only)
• A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound
occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different
each time the keys are played.
Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the
same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 59) or change the voice for each
part (page 57).
PSR-2100/1100
Specifications
: available
Model Name
PSR-2100
Sound Source
PSR-1100
AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
Display
320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD
Keyboard
61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch)
Voice
Polyphony (max)
64
32
338 voices + 480 XG voices
+ 16 Drum Kits
287 voices + 480 XG voices
+ 16 Drum Kits
328
287
Sweet Voice
14
8
Cool Voice
6
2
Voice Selection
Regular Voice
Live Voice
12
1
Others
296
276
10 (8 Footages)
—
Organ Flutes
Sound creator
Effects
Effect Blocks
Effect Types
Reverb
1
Chorus
1
DSP
4
1
Microphone
1
—
REVERB
29 Preset+3 User
23 Preset+3 User
CHORUS
25 Preset+3 User
15 Preset+3 User
DSP1/DSP
164 Preset+3 User
92 Preset+3 User
DSP2, 3, 4
88 Preset +10 User
—
Master EQ
5 Preset + 2 User
—
27 Parts
—
Part EQ
Vocal Harmony
Accompaniment
Style
Number of Accompaniment Styles
49 Preset +10 User
—
197
181
Number of Session Styles
Fingering
6
Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,
Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard
Style Creator
OTS (One Touch Setting)
4/Accompaniment Style
OTS link
Music Finder
2500 (max.)
1200 (max.)
Edit
Song
Format
SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ
Preset Songs
Lyrics
Score
Recording
Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing
Record Channels
4 Pads ✕ 54 Banks
Multi Pad
Preset
Memory
Device
Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD)
Flash Memory (internal)
Flash Availability
Tempo
16
1524KB
698KB
Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.
Tempo Range
5 - 500
Tap Tempo
Metronome
Sound
Bell on/off
PSR-2100/1100
165
Specifications
Model Name
Registration
Memory
PSR-2100
PSR-1100
Buttons
8
Regist Sequence
Freeze
Others
Demo
Language
Function, Voice, Style
6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)
Help
Direct Access
Master Volume
Fade In/Out
Transpose
Keyboard/Song/Master
Tuning
Scale
Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone,
Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2
Touch Response
Jacks/Connectors
5 level
DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), USB,
FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2,
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R)
MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./ LINE)
Pedal Functions
Amplifiers/
Speakers
12 W ✕ 2
Amplifiers
Speakers
[12 cm + 4 cm (dome)] ✕ 2
Power Consumption
(12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2
31 W
Power supply
Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included)
*May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]
(without Music Rest)
Weight
Optional
accessories
—
VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,
PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP,
STYLE START/STOP, etc.
973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm
[38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"]
10.5 Kg (23 lbs., 2 oz)
10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz)
Headphones
HPE-150
Foot Switch
FC4 / FC5
Foot Controller
FC7
Keyboard Stand
L-6, L-7s
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to
change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not
be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
166
PSR-2100/1100
Index
Numerics
1 - 16 ........................................................................... 99, 108
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 38–48
3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) .................................... 133
A
A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 141
[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 43
Accent Type ....................................................................... 117
Accessories ............................................................................ 6
Accompaniment style parts................................................... 97
[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 63
ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 141
ADD TO FAVORITE ............................................................. 72
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 124
Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17
Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 127
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 53
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings
and Microphone Effects .................................................. 133
Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 64
Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 81
Adjusting values ................................................................... 49
AI ......................................................................................... 65
AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 65
AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 65
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 141
Append ................................................................................ 74
Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 60
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 70
Arabic ................................................................................ 139
Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 67
Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 115
ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 93
Attack (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 94
ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 92
AUTO .................................................................................. 20
AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 140
[AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 69
Auto Revoice...................................................................... 125
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings
with the Sections............................................................... 71
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 156
B
[BACK] button .......................................................... 19, 43, 49
BALANCE............................................................................. 64
[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 64
Bar Clear ............................................................................ 118
Bar Copy ............................................................................ 118
Bar/Beat/Clock.................................................................... 100
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38
Bass...................................................................................... 97
BEAT .............................................................................. 73, 74
Beat Converter.................................................................... 116
Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 117
[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 67
BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 92
C
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 72
Cent....................................................................................138
Change the Rhythmic Feel ..................................................116
Changing Pitch-related Settings...........................................126
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings ...........146
Changing the Icon.................................................................49
Changing the Tone of the Voice..........................................126
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose .. 144
Channel ..................................................64, 81, 105, 118, 140
Channel Messages ..............................................................160
Channel Muting ....................................................................64
CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................64, 81
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 64, 81
Channel Transpose .............................................................107
CHD ...................................................................................109
Chord ...................................................................................97
Chord Detect ......................................................................150
Chord Events.......................................................................109
Chord Fingering ............................................................65, 142
CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................93
Chord Tutor ........................................................................142
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................66
Chorus ................................................................................129
CHORUS DEPTH (MIC.) .....................................................135
Chorus Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94
CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................93
Clock ..................................................................................149
COMMON ...........................................................................91
COMPARE ............................................................................90
Compatible Song Types ........................................................78
COMPRESSOR....................................................................134
CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................151
CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................152
Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................156
Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (PSR-2100 only) ......155
Connecting to a Computer ..................................................157
Controller ...........................................................................142
Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................48
Cool! ....................................................................................58
COPY ...................................................................................46
Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................153
Copying Files/Folders............................................................46
Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................153
Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................111
Current Memory ...................................................................40
Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................110
CUT......................................................................................45
D
Data Compatibility..............................................................161
[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 49
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........149
DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 156
DECAY .................................................................................92
DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................46
Delete (Song Creator)..........................................................106
DELETE RECORD..................................................................74
Deleting Files/Folders............................................................46
[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 55
DEPTH..................................................................................93
DESTINATION....................................................................106
Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................84
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 95, 111
PSR-2100/1100
167
Index
[DIRECT ACCESS] button ............................................... 19, 50
Direct Access Chart .............................................................. 51
Disk ................................................................................... 153
Disk drive....................................................................... 41, 42
Disk format......................................................................... 161
Disk Orchestra Collection .................................................... 17
DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER ................................................. 152
Displaying Music Notation ................................................... 83
Displaying the Lyrics ............................................................ 86
Displaying Upper Level pages .............................................. 47
DOC .................................................................................. 162
Drum ................................................................................... 58
[DSP] button .......................................................... 19, 60, 129
DSP Depth (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94
DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator) ................................................ 93
DSP on/off (Organ Flutes) ..................................................... 94
DSP Type (Organ Flutes) ...................................................... 94
Dynamics ........................................................................... 117
E
ECHO .......................................................................... 61, 146
Edit..................................................................................... 114
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 116
Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 105
Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 105
Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 109
Editing Note Events ............................................................ 108
Editing Records .................................................................... 74
Editing System Events ......................................................... 109
Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 118
Editing Voices ...................................................................... 90
[EFFECT] button ........................................................... 19, 131
Effect Block ........................................................................ 128
Effect Connections.............................................................. 129
Effect Structure ................................................................... 129
EFFECT/EQ ........................................................................... 93
EFFECT/EQ (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94
Effects................................................................................. 127
EG ........................................................................................ 92
EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 92
EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 92
EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 92
Embellish and enhance your melodies
— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29
END Mark .......................................................................... 103
ENDING .............................................................................. 69
[ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 68
[ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 49
Entering Characters............................................................... 48
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ......................... 102
Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 48
Entering numbers ................................................................. 48
Entering special character marks
(umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 48
Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 154
EQ.............................................................................. 124, 130
EQ High (Organ Flutes) ........................................................ 94
EQ Low (Organ Flutes) ......................................................... 94
Equal Temperament............................................................ 139
ESEQ .................................................................................. 162
Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 160
[EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 43
Exit from Small Pop-up Windows ......................................... 43
Expand/Compress ............................................................... 117
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 82
F
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time............151
[FADE IN / OUT] button .................................................18, 68
FAVORITE ............................................................................74
[FF] button ......................................................................18, 81
File .......................................................................................40
File/Folder-related Operations...............................................44
Files/folders in a floppy disk..................................................45
Fill ........................................................................................69
Filter .....................................................................92, 110, 126
FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator) ...........................................92
FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator)..........................................92
Fine ....................................................................................116
FINGERED ............................................................................65
FINGERED ON BASS ............................................................65
First Key On........................................................................104
FLOPPY DISK drive...................................................40, 41, 42
FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN ....................................153
Floppy disk drive ..............................................................7, 19
FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ........................................................156
FOOTAGE (Organ Flutes) .....................................................94
Footage (Organ Flutes) ..........................................................94
[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack ..................................19, 156
[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack...................................................19, 156
Formatting a Disk................................................................153
[FREEZE] button ..............................................................19, 89
Freeze...........................................................................89, 145
FULL KEYBOARD .................................................................65
[FUNCTION] button .....................................................18, 136
G
Gate Time...........................................................................100
GENRE............................................................................73, 75
GENRE NAME ......................................................................75
GM System Level 1 .......................................................17, 162
Groove ...............................................................................116
Groove parameters .............................................................116
GROUP SELECT....................................................................87
H
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7
Harmonic Content ................................................................92
HARMONY ............................................................61, 93, 146
Harmony Assignments ........................................................147
Harmony Types ..................................................................147
[HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................19, 61
Headphones .......................................................................155
Help messages can be displayed in any one of the
following languages...........................................................52
[HELP] button .................................................................18, 52
High Key.............................................................................120
Hz ......................................................................................138
I
ICON....................................................................................49
ICON SELECT .......................................................................49
[INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 155
Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................110
Instant Selection of Displays .................................................50
INTRO ..................................................................................69
[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 67
K
Kbd.Vel...............................................................................100
KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................84
168
PSR-2100/1100
Index
Keyboard Percussion ............................................................ 58
Keyboard Touch ................................................................. 144
Keyboard/Panel .................................................................. 144
KEYWORD..................................................................... 73, 74
Kirnberger .......................................................................... 139
L
L (LEFT) .............................................................................. 141
Layer .................................................................................... 59
Layering Two Different Voices ............................................. 59
LCD ..................................................................................... 15
[LCD CONTRAST] knob................................................. 19, 17
Left ....................................................................................... 60
LEFT CH ............................................................................... 84
[LEFT HOLD] button ...................................................... 19, 61
Length (LENG) (Organ Flutes). .............................................. 94
Live! ..................................................................................... 58
Local Control ..................................................................... 148
Loop recording ................................................................... 111
Lyrics ........................................................................... 86, 110
LYRICS LANGUAGE .......................................................... 140
M
MAIN A/B/C/D ..................................................................... 67
MAIN [A] button ............................................................ 18, 67
MAIN [B] button ............................................................ 18, 67
MAIN [C] button ............................................................ 18, 67
MAIN [D] button ............................................................ 18, 67
Maintaining Panel Settings ................................................. 145
Making Global and Other Important Settings...................... 136
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)...148
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap ................................................ 151
Making Settings for the Display
and Voice Number Indication ......................................... 152
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ..................... 142
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone... 133
Making Style File Format Settings ....................................... 119
Master Tune ....................................................................... 138
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................ 18, 17
Mean-Tone......................................................................... 139
[MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 87
Message Switch .................................................................. 149
Messages ................................................................................ 8
Metronome ........................................................................ 151
[METRONOME] button .................................................. 18, 53
MIC. ................................................................................... 131
MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ...................................... 19, 131
[MIC. LINE IN] jack ...................................................... 19, 155
MICROPHONE SETTING ................................................... 133
[MIC. SETTING] button ................................................ 19, 131
MIDI .................................................................................. 148
MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals ........................................... 19, 156
MIDI channels.................................................................... 160
MIDI IN.............................................................................. 156
MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 156
MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 150
MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 154
MIDI terminals ................................................................... 156
Mix .................................................................................... 106
[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 124
Mode (Organ Flutes)............................................................. 94
MODULATION...................................................... 18, 61, 144
[MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 61
MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 91
Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 45
MULTI FINGER.....................................................................65
MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons...........................................18, 76
Multi Pads.............................................................................14
Multi Recording ....................................................................97
[MUSIC FINDER] button .....................................15, 19, 33, 72
Music Finder Record Edit ......................................................74
Music Finder Search .............................................................73
Music Rest ............................................................................17
Muting Specific Parts ............................................................82
N
NAME.............................................................................44, 47
Naming Files and Folders......................................................44
NEW (Folder) ........................................................................47
NEW RECORD .....................................................................75
[NEXT] button...........................................................19, 43, 49
NOISE GATE.......................................................................133
Normal ...............................................................................104
Note Events.........................................................................108
Note Limit...........................................................................120
NOTE NAME ........................................................................85
Nrm. ...................................................................................100
NTR (Note Transposition Rule)............................................119
NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..........................................120
NUMBER OF RECORDS .......................................................72
O
OCTAVE .............................................................................126
OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) .............................................91
OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) ..........................................91
One Touch Setting ................................................................32
ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons...................19, 70, 71
Open/Save displays...............................................................39
Organ Flutes .............................................................15, 58, 94
Organ Type (Organ Flutes)....................................................94
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder...........................47
Original Beat ......................................................................116
Other Parameters in the Basic Display ................................114
Other Playback-related Operations .......................................81
Other Settings .....................................................................151
OTS LINK TIMING..............................................................141
[OTS LINK] button ..........................................................18, 71
OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks..........................................19, 156
OVERALL SETTING ............................................................133
Overdub recording .............................................................111
Owner ................................................................................154
P
Pad .......................................................................................97
PAN (MIC.) .........................................................................135
PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) .........................................93
Parameter ...........................................................................119
Parameter Lock ...................................................................152
PASTE .............................................................................45, 46
Pedal ..................................................................................142
PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY.........................................................142
PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT.....................................................104
Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................143
[PHONES] jack .............................................................18, 155
Phrase...................................................................................97
Phrase Mark..................................................................81, 140
PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................140
PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 61
PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................126
Pitch settings for each scale ................................................139
Playback of Songs .................................................................21
PSR-2100/1100
169
Index
Playing a style ................................................................ 28, 62
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only ............................... 64
Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100 ................................ 36
Playing Back Songs on Disk ................................................. 81
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ........ 27
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically
when changing accompaniment sections .......................... 69
Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously ................................ 59
Playing Styles ....................................................................... 28
Playing the Demos ......................................................... 20, 55
Playing the Internal Songs .................................................... 79
Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through
an external audio system, and recording the sounds
to an external recorder .................................................... 156
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..................................... 26
Playing Voices...................................................................... 25
Playing with the Songs ......................................................... 36
PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) ..................................... 91
PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console).............................. 126
Power Supply ....................................................................... 16
Powering Up ........................................................................ 17
Power-on Procedure............................................................. 16
PRESET drive .................................................................. 40, 41
Preset MIDI Templates........................................................ 148
Punch In/Out...................................................................... 104
Pure Major ......................................................................... 139
Pure Minor ......................................................................... 139
Pythagorean ....................................................................... 139
Q
QUANTIZE .......................................................................... 84
Quantize .................................................................... 105, 118
Quantize Size..................................................................... 105
Quick Recording .................................................................. 96
QUICK START.................................................................... 140
Quick Start ......................................................................... 140
R
Realtime Recording ............................................................ 113
Realtime Recording Characteristics..................................... 111
[REC] button................................................................... 18, 95
REC END............................................................................ 104
Rec Mode........................................................................... 104
REC START......................................................................... 104
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup................................. 89
Recalling the Registered Settings........................................... 89
Receive .............................................................................. 150
Receive Transpose.............................................................. 149
Receiving MIDI Data .......................................................... 150
Record ................................................................................. 72
RECORD EDIT...................................................................... 74
Recording............................................................................. 37
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment .... 102
Recording Individual Notes .................................................. 99
Recording Melodies ........................................................... 101
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................ 95
Registering Panel Setups ....................................................... 87
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 71
REGISTRATION EDIT display ............................................... 88
Registration Memory ............................................................ 87
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 87
REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 87
Registration Sequence ........................................................ 145
Regular Voice Parameters..................................................... 91
RELEASE ............................................................................... 92
Remove Event .................................................................... 118
170
PSR-2100/1100
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range.....................................82
[REPEAT] button .............................................................18, 82
Replace.................................................................................74
Resonance ............................................................................92
Response (RESP) (Organ Flutes).............................................94
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PSR-2100/1100......................................................154
Reverb ................................................................................129
REVERB DEPTH (MIC.) .......................................................135
Reverb Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94
REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator)...........................................93
[REW] button ..................................................................18, 81
Rhythm .................................................................................97
RIGHT CH ............................................................................84
Root....................................................................................150
Rotary SP Speed (Organ Flutes) .............................................94
RTR (Retrigger Rule)............................................................120
S
S.STOP WINDOW..............................................................141
SAVE.....................................................................................47
Save................................................................................39, 47
Saving Files...........................................................................47
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups ..............................88
Scale...................................................................................139
Scale Tune ..........................................................................138
Score (PSR-2100 only) ..........................................................83
Searching the Ideal Setups ....................................................73
Searching the Music Finder Records .....................................34
Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons............67
SECTION SET......................................................................141
Sections ................................................................................30
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out ..............................................................104
Selecting a Scale .................................................................138
Selecting a Voice ..................................................................57
Selecting Files and Folders ....................................................43
Selecting Intro and Ending Types ..........................................69
Selecting items......................................................................49
Selecting the Freeze Settings .................................................89
SEQUENCE END ................................................................145
Sequence Format ................................................................162
Sequencer...........................................................................159
Set Up.................................................................................107
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters................141
Setting Chord Channels.......................................................150
Setting Harmony and Echo..................................................146
Setting Root Note Channels ................................................150
Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections
of the Keyboard .................................................................60
Setting Song-related Parameters ..........................................140
Setting the Fingering Method ..............................................142
Setting the Level Balance and Voice ...................................125
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ...........135
Setting the MIDI Parameters................................................148
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ....145
Setting the volume ................................................................17
SFX .......................................................................................58
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ... 80
SINGLE FINGER....................................................................65
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................162
Song ...............................................................................14, 78
SONG [START / STOP] button ........................................18, 79
SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................125
SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................140
Song Creator .........................................................................95
Index
Song Playback .......................................................... 21, 78, 79
Song Recording .................................................................... 95
Song Settings ...................................................................... 140
SORT BY .............................................................................. 72
SORT ORDER....................................................................... 72
SOUND (SOUND CREATOR) .............................................. 92
[SOUND CREATOR] button ........................................... 18, 90
Source Root/Chord ............................................................. 119
SOURCE1 .......................................................................... 106
SOURCE2 .......................................................................... 106
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory
Presets ............................................................................ 145
SPEED .................................................................................. 93
SPEED (HARMONY)............................................................. 93
Split Point........................................................................... 141
[STANDBY/ON] switch ............................................ 14, 18, 17
START SEARCH.................................................................... 73
Step Record .......................................................................... 99
Step Record (Chord) ........................................................... 102
Step Record (Note) ............................................................. 101
Step Recording ................................................................... 114
STOP ACMP....................................................................... 141
[STOP] button (MULTI PAD) .......................................... 18, 76
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys ............... 68
Strength .............................................................................. 117
Style ............................................................................... 14, 62
STYLE [START / STOP] button ........................................ 18, 63
STYLE buttons ................................................................ 18, 62
Style Creator....................................................................... 111
Style File ...................................................................... 17, 162
Style File Format................................................................. 112
Style Sections ....................................................................... 30
Style Setting........................................................................ 141
Sustain ........................................................................... 92, 93
[SUSUTAIN] button........................................................ 19, 60
Sweet! .................................................................................. 58
Swing ................................................................................. 116
[SYNC.START] button .................................................... 18, 63
[SYNC.STOP] button ...................................................... 18, 68
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive).................................................. 109
System................................................................................ 148
System and Insertion .......................................................... 129
System Events ..................................................................... 109
System Messages ................................................................ 161
System Reset....................................................................... 154
SYSTEM SET UP ................................................................. 154
T
[TALK] button............................................................... 19, 131
TALK SETTING ................................................................... 135
Tap Count .......................................................................... 152
[TAP TEMPO] button...................................................... 18, 54
TEMPO [E] [ ] buttons ............................................. 18, 53
TEMPO FROM ..................................................................... 73
Tempo Indications — MAIN Display .................................... 54
TEMPO TO .......................................................................... 73
[TOP] button .................................................................. 18, 81
TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR (MIC.) ............................ 135
TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................ 93
TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator) ........................................... 91
[TOUCH] button ............................................................ 19, 60
[TRACK 1 (R)] button...................................................... 18, 82
[TRACK 2 (L)] button ...................................................... 18, 82
Transmit ............................................................................. 149
Transmit Clock ................................................................... 149
Transmitting MIDI Data ...................................................... 149
TRANSPOSE [E] [F] buttons................................... 18, 144
Transpose Assign ................................................................144
Tune ...................................................................................126
TUNING.............................................................................126
Tuning the Overall Pitch .....................................................138
TYPE (HARMONY) ...............................................................93
U
[UPPER OCTAVE] button................................................19, 61
USB ......................................................................................17
[USB] terminal ........................................................15, 19, 157
USER drive................................................................40, 41, 42
USER EFFECT (Function) .....................................................154
User Effect (Mixing Console) ...............................................128
Using a Microphone ...........................................................131
Using the Music Finder .........................................................33
Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices .................155
Utility .................................................................................151
V
[VARIATION] button ......................................................19, 61
Variation (Organ Flutes) ........................................................94
Velocity ......................................................................100, 117
Velocity Change .................................................................118
[VH TYPE SELECT] button.............................................19, 131
VIBRATO..............................................................................93
VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator).........................................92
Vibrato Depth (Organ Flutes) ................................................94
VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................92
Vibrato On/Off (Organ Flutes)...............................................94
VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) .........................................92
Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) (Organ Flutes)............................94
[VOCAL HARMONY] button ........................................19, 131
Vocal Harmony ....................................................................15
VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL .........................................134
Vocal Harmony Type..........................................................131
Voice Allocation Format .....................................................162
VOICE buttons ..........................................................15, 19, 57
Voice Characteristics ............................................................58
Voice Effects .........................................................................60
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button..........................19, 59
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button.............................19, 59
VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button...........................19, 59
Voice Set ............................................................................146
VOL/ATTACK (Organ Flutes).................................................94
VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................93
VOLUME (MIC.) .................................................................135
VOLUME (Sound Creator).....................................................91
Volume (VOL) (Organ Flutes)................................................94
Volume/Voice.....................................................................125
W
Werckmeister......................................................................139
What You Can Do With MIDI.............................................161
What’s MIDI?......................................................................158
X
XF .................................................................................17, 162
XG ................................................................................17, 162
PSR-2100/1100
171
E
Index
MEMO
172
PSR-2100/1100
Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR
1 YEAR PARTS
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is
applicable to all models included in the following series of products:
PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to
have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for
parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha
will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous
expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products
and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE
PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages.
Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the
product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an
explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting
service and/or parts under warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be
issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if
needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this
manual and to follow all safety precautions.
EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged
removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the
product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of
Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model________________________
Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________
Purchased from______________________________________________________
(Retailer)
Date__________________________________
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur
in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual,
may cause interference harmful to the operation of
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som
den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har
stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá
selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
(class B)
Introduction
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on
the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where
anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over
power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an
extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an
extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or
less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number,
the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by
Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing
loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high
volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time
period before damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or
accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with
the product or as optional accessories. Some of these
items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.
Please make sure that benches are stable and any
optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating
only. No other uses are recommended.
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable
battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The
average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries.
Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that
the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and
that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new,
or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be
installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation
may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.
Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used
batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your
area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type
batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair,
or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at
an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is
unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should
record the model number, serial number, and the date
of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panamá S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is
operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
THE NETHERLANDS
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-BP (bottom)
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
NOTICE:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user
safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe
that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Yamaha Music Central Europe
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ASIA
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France, S.A.
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,
Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[PK] 27
PSR2100/1100_Cover 裏 - 1 -
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
DIC 99
OWNER’S MANUAL
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation
Printed in China
WA44060 302APAP3.3-02B0
OWNER’S
OWNER’S MANUAL
MANUAL